BS EN 60204‑1:2018
BSI Standards Publication
Safety of machinery - Electrical
equipment of machines
Part 1: General requirements
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
BRITISH STANDARD
National foreword
This British Standard is the UK implementation of EN 60204‑1:2018.
It is derived from IEC 60204‑1:2016. It supersedes
BS EN 60204‑1:2006+A1:2009, which is withdrawn.
The CENELEC common modifications have been implemented at the
appropriate places in the text. The start and finish o f each common
modification is indicated in the text by tags
.

The UK participation in its preparation was entrusted to Technical
Committee MCE/3, Sa feguarding o f machinery.
A list o f organizations represented on this committee can be obtained on
request to its secretary.
This publication does not purport to include all the necessary provisions
o f a contract. Users are responsible for its correct application.
© The British Standards Institution 2018
Published by BSI Standards Limited 2018
ISBN 978 0 580 73746 6
ICS 31.020; 29.020; 13.110
Compliance with a British Standard cannot confer immunity from
legal obligations.
This British Standard was published under the authority o f the
Standards Policy and Strategy Committee on 30 September 2018.
Amendments/corrigenda issued since publication
Date
Text affected
EUROPEAN STANDARD
NORME EUROPÉENNE
EUROPÄISCHE NORM
EN 60204-1
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
September 201 8
ICS 1 3.1 1 0; 29.020
Supersedes EN 60204-1 :2006
English Version
Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 : General requirements
(IEC 60204-1 :201 6 , modified)
Sécurité des machines - Équipement électrique des
machines - Partie 1 : Exigences générales
(IEC 60204-1 :201 6 , modifiée)
Sicherheit von Maschinen - Elektrische Ausrüstung von
Maschinen - Teil 1 : Allgemeine Anforderungen
(IEC 60204-1 :201 6 , modifiziert)
This European Standard was approved by CENELEC on 201 8-03-1 9. CENELEC members are bound to comply with the CEN/CENELEC
Internal Regulations which stipulate the conditions for giving this European Standard the status of a national standard without any alteration.
Up-to-date lists and bibliographical references concerning such national standards may be obtained on application to the CEN-CENELEC
Management Centre or to any CENELEC member.
This European Standard exists in three official versions (English, French, German). A version in any other language made by translation
under the responsibility of a CENELEC member into its own language and notified to the CEN-CENELEC Management Centre has the
same status as the official versions.
CENELEC members are the national electrotechnical committees of Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, the Czech Republic,
Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia,
Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, the Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, Turkey and the United Kingdom.
European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique
Europäisches Komitee für Elektrotechnische Normung
CEN-CENELEC Management Centre: Rue de la Science 23, B-1 040 Brussels
© 201 8 CENELEC All rights of exploitation in any form and by any means reserved worldwide for CENELEC Members.
Ref. No. EN 60204-1 :201 8 E
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E)
European foreword
This document (EN 60204-1 :201 8) consists of the text of IEC 60204-1 :201 6, prepared by IEC/TC 44
"Safety of machinery - Electrotechnical aspects", together with the common modifications prepared by
CLC/TC 44X "Safety of machinery: electrotechnical aspects".
The following dates are fixed:
•
•
latest date by which this document has to be
implemented at national level by publication
of an identical national standard or by
endorsement
latest date by which the national standards
conflicting with this document have to be
withdrawn
(dop)
201 9-03-1 4
(dow)
2021 -09-1 4
This document supersedes EN 60204-1 :2006.
Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this document may be the subject of
patent rights. CENELEC shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights.
Clauses, subclauses, notes, tables, figures and annexes which are additional to those in
IEC 60204-1 :201 6 are prefixed “Z”.
This document has been prepared under a mandate given to CENELEC by the European Commission
and the European Free Trade Association, and supports essential requirements of EU Directive(s).
For the relationship with EU Directives, see informative Annexes ZZA and ZZB, which are integral
parts of this document.
Endorsement notice
The text of the International Standard IEC 60204-1 :201 6 was approved by CENELEC as a European
Standard with agreed common modifications.
2
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E)
Annex ZA
(normative)
Normative references to international publications
with their corresponding European publications
The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their content
constitutes requirements of this document. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For
undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments)
applies.
NOTE 1 Where an International Publication has been modified by common modifications, indicated by (mod), the relevant
EN/HD applies.
NOTE 2 Up-to-date information on the latest versions of the European Standards listed in this annex is available here:
www.cenelec.eu.
Publication
Year
Title
EN/HD
Year
IEC 60034-1 (mod)
201 0
EN 60034-1
201 0
-
-
Rotating electrical machines Part 1 : Rating and performance
+ corr. October
201 0
IEC 60072
series
Dimensions and output series for
rotating electrical machines
-
-
IEC 60309-1
1 999
EN 60309-1
1 999
+ A1 (mod)
2005
+ A1
2007
+ A2
201 2
Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for
industrial purposes Part 1 : General requirements
+ A2
201 2
IEC 60364-1 (mod)
2005
Low-voltage electrical installations Part 1 : Fundamental principles,
assessment of general characteristics,
definitions
HD 60364-1
2008
IEC 60364-4-41 (mod)
2005
HD 60364-4-41
2007
-
-
Low-voltage electrical installations Part 4-41 : Protection for safety Protection against electric shock
+ corr. July
2007
IEC 60364-4-43 (mod)
2008
Low voltage electrical installations Part 4-43: Protection for safety Protection against overcurrent
HD 60364-4-43
201 0
IEC 60364-5-52 (mod)
2009
Low-voltage electrical installations Part 5-52: Selection and erection of
electrical equipment - Wiring systems
HD 60364-5-52
201 1
IEC 60364-5-53
2001
-
-
+ A1 (mod)
+ A2 (mod)
2002
201 5
Electrical installations of buildings Part 5-53: Selection and erection of
electrical equipment - Isolation,
switching and control
HD 60364-5-534
HD 60364-5-534
2008
201 6
1)
2)
1 ) IEC 60364-5-53:2001 /A1 :2002, Clause 534: “Devices for protection against overvoltages” is harmonized as
HD 60364-5-534:2008. HD 60364-5-534:2008 will be superseded by HD 60364-5-534:201 6 on 201 8-1 2-1 4.
2) IEC 60364-5-53:2001 /A2:201 5, Clause 534: “Devices for protection against overvoltages” is harmonized as
HD 60364-5-534:201 6.
3
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E)
Publication
Year
Title
EN/HD
Year
IEC 60364-5-54
201 1
Low-voltage electrical installations Part 5-54: Selection and erection of
electrical equipment - Earthing
arrangements and protective
conductors
HD 60364-5-54
201 1
IEC 6041 7-DB
2002
Graphical symbols for use on
equipment
-
-
IEC 60445
201 0
Basic and safety principles for manmachine interface, marking and
identification - Identification of
equipment terminals, conductor
terminations and conductors
EN 60445
201 0
IEC 60529
-
1 989
-
Degrees of protection provided by
enclosures (IP Code)
EN 60529
+ corr. May
1 991
1 993
+ A1
1 999
+ A1
2000
+ A2
201 3
+ A2
201 3
IEC 60664-1
2007
Insulation coordination for equipment
within low-voltage systems Part 1 : Principles, requirements and
tests
EN 60664-1
2007
IEC 60947-2
201 6
Low voltage switchgear and
controlgear Part 2: Circuit-breakers
EN 60947-2
201 7
IEC 60947-3
2008
EN 60947-3
2009
+ A1
+ A2
201 2
201 5
Low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear Part 3: Switches, disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors and fusecombination units
+ A1
+ A2
201 2
201 5
IEC 60947-5-1
2003
EN 60947-5-1
2004
-
-
+ corr. November
2004
+ A1
2009
+ corr. July
+ A1
2005
2009
IEC 60947-5-5
1 997
EN 60947-5-5
1 997
+ A1
2005
+ A1
2005
-
-
+ A1 1
201 3
+ A2
201 6
Low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear Part 5-5: Control circuit devices and
switching elements - Electrical
emergency stop device with
mechanical latching function
+ A2
201 7
IEC 60947-6-2
2002
EN 60947-6-2
2003
+ A1
2007
+ A1
2007
IEC 61 1 40
201 6
Low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear Part 6-2: Multiple function equipment Control and protective switching
devices (or equipment) (CPS)
Protection against electric shock Common aspects for installation and
equipment
EN 61 1 40
201 6
IEC 61 31 0
series
EN 61 31 0
series
4
Low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear Part 5-1 : Control circuit devices and
switching elements - Electromechanical
control circuit devices
Safety of machinery - Indication,
marking and actuation
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E)
Publication
Year
Title
EN/HD
Year
IEC 61 439-1
201 1
Low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear assemblies Part 1 : General rules
EN 61 439-1
201 1
IEC 61 558-1
2005
EN 61 558-1
2005
-
-
+ corr. August
2006
+ A1
2009
Safety of power transformers, power
supplies, reactors and similar
products Part 1 : General requirements and tests
+ A1
2009
IEC 61 558-2-6
2009
Safety of transformers, reactors, power
supply units and similar products for
supply voltages up to 1 1 00 V Part 2-6:
Particular requirements and tests for
safety isolating transformers and power
supply units incorporating safety
isolating transformers
EN 61 558-2-6
2009
IEC 61 984
2008
Connectors - Safety requirements and
tests
EN 61 984
2009
IEC 62023
201 1
Structuring of technical information and
documentation
EN 62023
201 2
IEC 62061
-
2005
-
EN 62061
+ corr. February
2005
201 0
+ A1
201 2
Safety of machinery - Functional safety
of safety-related electrical, electronic
and programmable electronic control
systems
+ A1
201 3
+ A2
201 5
+ A2
201 5
ISO 701 0
201 1
EN ISO 701 0
201 2
+ A1
201 2
+ A1
201 4
+ A2
201 2
+ A2
201 4
+ A3
201 2
+ A3
201 4
+ A4
201 3
+ A4
201 4
+ A5
201 4
+ A5
201 5
+ A6
201 4
+ A6
201 6
+ A7
201 6
+ A7
ISO 1 3849-1
201 5
Safety of machinery - Safety-related
Parts of control systems Part 1 : General principles for design
EN ISO 1 3849-1
201 7
201 5
ISO 1 3849-2
201 2
Safety of machinery - Safety-related
Parts of control systems Part 2: Validation
EN ISO 1 3849-2
201 2
ISO 1 3850
2006
Safety of machinery - Emergency stop Principles for design
EN ISO 1 3850
2006
Graphical symbols - Safety colours and
safety signs - Registered safety signs
3)
3)
Superseded by ISO 1 3850:201 5, Safety of machinery - Emergency stop function - Principles for design.
4)
EN ISO 1 3850:2006 is superseded by EN ISO 1 3850:201 5, which is based on ISO 1 3850:201 5.
4)
5
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E)
Annex ZZA
(informative)
Relationship between this European Standard and the essential
requirements of Directive 2006/42/EC [2006 OJ L 1 57] aimed to be
covered
This European Standard has been prepared under a Commission’s standardization request M/396 EN
to provide one voluntary means of conforming to essential requirements of Directive 2006/42/EC of
the European Parliament and of the Council of 1 7 May 2006 on machinery, and amending Directive
95/1 6/EC (recast) [2006 OJ L 1 57].
Once this standard is cited in the Official Journal of the European Union under that Directive,
compliance with the normative clauses of this standard given in Table ZZA.1 confers, within the limits
of the scope of this standard, a presumption of conformity with the corresponding requirements of that
Directive, and associated EFTA regulations.
Table ZZA.1 – Correspondence between this European Standard
and Annex 1 of Directive 2006/42/EC [2006 OJ L 1 57]
Essential Requirements of
Directive 2006/42/EC
1 .2.1
1 .2.2
1 .2.3
1 .2.4.1
1 .2.4.2
1 .2.4.3
1 .2.4.4
1 .2.5
1 .2.6
1 .5.1
1 .5.4
1 .5.5
1 .6.3
1 .6.4
1 .7.1 .
1 .7.1 .1
1 .7.1 .2
1 .7.2
1 .7.4.2 (e,g, i,j,m,p,r,s,t)
1 .7.4.2 u, 1 .5.8
6
Clause(s) / sub-clause(s)
of this EN
Clause 4, 5.4, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.8,
7.1 0, 8.4, Clause 9, 1 0.6, 1 0.9,
1 1 .2.3
4.4, Clause 1 0, Clause 1 1 , 1 6.3
7.3.1 , 7.5, 9.2.3.2, 9.3.1
9.2.2, 9.2.3.3
9.2.2, 9.2.3.3, 9.2.3.6, 9.4
9.2.3.4.2, 1 0.7
9.2.3.3, 9.2.3.4.2
9.2.3.5
5.4, 7.5
All
1 3.4.5(d), Clause 1 7
7.4, 1 6.2.2
5.3, 1 0.8
Clause 1 1
Clause 1 6, Clause 1 7
Clause 1 6, Clause 1 7
1 0.1 .1 , 1 0.3, 1 0.4, Clause 1 6
Clause 1 6, Clause 1 7
Clause 1 7
Remarks / Notes
These essential requirements
are specifically excluded as
noise has not been considered
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E)
Essential Requirements of
Directive 2006/42/EC
1 .5.1 0, 1 .5.1 1
Clause(s) / sub-clause(s)
of this EN
Remarks / Notes
during the development of the
standard
These essential requirements
have been excluded as the
electromagnetic compliance
information only gives methods
that have proved useful and are
supplied as guidance.
WARNING 1 — Presumption of conformity stays valid only as long as a reference to this European
Standard is maintained in the list published in the Official Journal of the European Union. Users of this
standard should consult frequently the latest list published in the Official Journal of the European
Union.
WARNING 2 — Other Union legislation may be applicable to the product(s) falling within the scope of
this standard.
7
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E)
Annex ZZB
(informative)
Relationship between this European Standard and the safety
objectives of Directive 201 4/35/EU [201 4 OJ L96] aimed to be
covered
This European standard has been prepared under a Commission’s standardization request relating to
harmonised standards in the field of the Low Voltage Directive, M/51 1 , to provide one voluntary means
of conforming to safety objectives of Directive 201 4/35/EU of the European Parliament and of the
Council of 26 February 201 4 on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to the
making available on the market of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits
[201 4 OJ L96].
Once this standard is cited in the Official Journal of the European Union under that Directive,
compliance with the normative clauses of this standard given in Table ZZB.1 confers, within the limits
of the scope of this standard, a presumption of conformity with the corresponding safety objectives of
that Directive, and associated EFTA regulations.
Table ZZB.1 – Correspondence between this European Standard
and Annex I of Directive 201 4/35/EU [201 4 OJ L96]
Safety objectives of
Directive 201 4/35/EU
1 a)
Clause(s) / sub-clause(s)
of this EN
Clause 1 6, 5. 1 , 5. 2, 5. 3, 5. 6, 6. 2,
Remarks/note
8. 2, 8. 3, 1 0. 2, 1 0. 8, 1 1 . 1 , 1 1 . 2,
1 3. 1 , 1 3. 2
1 b)
1 c)
2 a)
2 b)
2 c)
2 d)
8
4. 2, 5. 3, 5. 5, 6. 2, 6. 2. 4, 7. 2,
7. 2. 2, 8. 2, 9. 2, , 1 1 .2, Clause 1 2,
1 3, 1 3.4.4, 1 3.4.5, 1 4.4,
Clause 1 5, Clause 1 7, Clause 1 8
Introduction, 1 , 3, 1 1 .1 , 1 1 .2
Refer to 2a) to 2d) and 3a) to 3c)in
this table
4.1 , 4.2, Clause 5, Clause 6, 7.1 ,
7.2, 7.7, 7.8, 7.1 0, Clause 8,
Clause 9, 1 1 .3, 1 1 .4, Clause 1 2,
1 3.2, Clause 1 5, Clause 1 6,
Clause 1 8, Annex A
Clause 4, 4.4.3, 4.5, 7.2, 7.3,
For electromagnetic fields, this
7.4, 7.9, 7.1 0, 1 1 .2.3, 1 1 .4,
standard does not provide
Clause 1 2, 1 3.1 .4, 1 4.4, 1 4.5,
performance requirements for either
1 6.2.2
immunity or emissions. Only
general advice is given. EMF is not
covered. Ionizing radiation is not
considered.
4.1 , 4.4.8, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 7.5, Noise is not considered in this
7.6, Clause 9, Clause 1 0, 1 3.1 ,
standard. Functional safety is not
Clause 1 4, 1 5.2
fully covered. Explosion of batteries
has not been covered by this
standard. Optical radiation is not
covered.
6.2.3, 6.3, 6.4, 7.2.7, 9.4,
Clause 1 2, 1 3.3, 1 3.4.3, 1 3.5,
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E)
Safety objectives of
Directive 201 4/35/EU
3 a)
3 b)
3 c)
Clause(s) / sub-clause(s)
of this EN
1 4.4, Clause 1 8
6.2.2, 6.2.3, 8.2.1 , 8.2.2, 8.2.3,
1 1 .4, 1 2.2, 1 2.3, 1 2.6.1 , 1 2.6.2,
1 3.3, 1 3.4, 1 3.5, 1 4.2 1 4.6
4.6, 6.2.3, 1 0.1 .3, 1 1 .3, 1 1 .4,
1 2.7.6
Remarks/note
The standard only considers the
mechanical requirements for
electrical parts of a machine.
For EMC, this standard does not
provide performance requirements
for either immunity or emissions.
Only general advice is given
Hazard associated with EMC and
functional safety are not covered.
Safety-related security is not
covered
3, Clause 7, Clause 8, 9.2, 1 1 .4,
1 4.6, 1 5.1
WARNING 1 — Presumption of conformity stays valid only as long as a reference to this European
Standard is maintained in the list published in the Official Journal of the European Union. Users of this
standard should consult frequently the latest list published in the Official Journal of the European
Union.
WARNING 2 — Other Union legislation may be applicable to the product(s) falling within the scope of
this standard.
9
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
–2–
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
CON TEN TS
FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0
I N TRODU CTI ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3
1
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5
2
N ormative references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6
3
Terms, d efin itions and abbreviated terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7
3. 1
Terms an d d efin itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7
3. 2
Abbreviated terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4
4. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4. 2
Selection of equ ipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4. 2. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4. 2. 2
Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4. 3
Electrical suppl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4. 3. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4. 3. 2
AC su pplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4. 3. 3
DC su pplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4. 3. 4
Special supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4. 4
Ph ysical en vironmen t and operating cond itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4. 4. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4. 4. 2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EM C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4. 4. 3
Ambien t air temperatu re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4. 4. 4
H u mid ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4. 4. 5
Altitu d e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4. 4. 6
Con taminan ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4. 4. 7
I onizin g an d n on-ionizing rad iation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4. 4. 8
Vibration , shock, and bump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4. 5
Transportation an d storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4. 6
Provisions for hand ling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5
I ncomin g suppl y cond uctor terminations and devices for d iscon necting and
switch ing off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5. 1
I ncomin g supply cond uctor terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
5. 2
Terminal for connection of the external protective cond uctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5. 3
Su ppl y d isconnectin g (isolatin g) d evice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5. 3. 1
5. 3. 2
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5. 3. 3
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5. 3. 4
Operating means of the su ppl y d iscon necting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5. 3. 5
Excepted circu its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5. 4
Devices for removal of power for preven tion of un expected start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5. 5
Devices for isolatin g electrical equ ipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5. 6
Protection against unau th orized , inad vertent and /or mistaken connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Protection against electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6
6. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6. 2
Basic protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6. 2. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
6. 2. 2
Protection by encl osures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
–3–
Protection by insu lation of l ive parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6. 2. 3
6. 2. 4
Protection against resid ual vol tages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6. 2. 5
Protection by barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6. 2. 6
Protection by placin g ou t of reach or protection by obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6. 3
Faul t protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6. 3. 1
6. 3. 2
Preven tion of th e occurrence of a touch vol tage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6. 3. 3
Protection by automatic d isconnection of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
6. 4
Protection by th e use of PELV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6. 4. 1
General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6. 4. 2
Sources for PELV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7
Protection of equ ipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7. 2
Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7. 2. 1
7. 2. 2
Supply con ductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
7. 2. 3
Power circu its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7. 2. 4
Con trol circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7. 2. 5
Socket ou tlets and their associated cond uctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7. 2. 6
Ligh ting circu its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7. 2. 7
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7. 2. 8
Location of overcurren t protective d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7. 2. 9
Overcurren t protective d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7. 2. 1 0
Ratin g an d settin g of overcurren t protective devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7. 3
Protection of motors against overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7. 3. 1
7. 3. 2
Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7. 3. 3
Over-temperature protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7. 4
Protection against abnormal temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7. 5
Protection against the effects of suppl y in terruption or vol tage red uction and
su bseq uen t restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7. 6
M otor overspeed protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7. 7
Ad ditional earth faul t/resid ual current protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7. 8
Ph ase sequence protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7. 9
Protection against overvol tages d ue to l ightning and to switch in g surges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
7. 1 0 Sh ort-circu it curren t ratin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8
Eq uipoten tial bond ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
8. 2
Protective bond ing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8. 2. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8. 2. 2
Protective cond uctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
8. 2. 3
Con tinu ity of th e protective bon ding circu it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
8. 2. 4
Protective cond uctor connecting poin ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8. 2. 5
M obile machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8. 2. 6
Ad d itional req uiremen ts for electrical equ ipmen t havin g earth leakage
cu rren ts high er th an 1 0 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
8. 3
M easures to restrict the effects of h igh l eakage cu rren t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
8. 4
Functional bond ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9
Con trol circuits an d con trol fu nctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
–4–
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
9. 1
Con trol circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9. 1 . 1
Con trol circuit suppl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
9. 1 . 2
Con trol circuit voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9. 1 . 3
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9. 2
Con trol fu nctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9. 2. 1
9. 2. 2
Categories of stop fu nctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9. 2. 3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
9. 2. 4
Cableless control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
9. 3
Protective interl ocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reclosin g or resetting of an in terlocking safeguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9. 3. 1
9. 3. 2
Exceed ing operatin g l imits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9. 3. 3
Operation of au xil iary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9. 3. 4
I nterlocks between differen t operations and for contrary motions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9. 3. 5
Reverse curren t braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9. 3. 6
Suspension of safety fu nctions and /or protective measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9. 4
Con trol fu nctions in the event of failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9. 4. 1
General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9. 4. 2
M easures to minimize risk in the even t of fail ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
9. 4. 3
Protection against mal function of con trol circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1 0 Operator in terface and mach ine-mou n ted con trol d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1 0. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1 0. 1 . 1
1 0. 1 . 2
Location and moun ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1 0. 1 . 3
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1 0. 1 . 4
Position sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1 0. 1 . 5
Portable and pend ant control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1 0. 2 Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1 0. 2. 1
Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1 0. 2. 2
M arkings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1 0. 3 I n dicator l ights and d isplays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1 0. 3. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1 0. 3. 2
Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1 0. 3. 3
Flash ing lights and d isplays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1 0. 4 I ll umin ated push-bu ttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1 0. 5 Rotary control d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1 0. 6 Start d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1 0. 7 Emergency stop d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Location of emergency stop d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1 0. 7. 1
1 0. 7. 2
Types of emergency stop device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1 0. 7. 3
Operation of th e suppl y d isconnecting d evice to effect emergency stop . . . . . . . . . 70
1 0. 8 Emergency switch ing off d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1 0. 8. 1
Location of emergency switch ing off d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1 0. 8. 2
Types of emergency switch in g off d evice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1 0. 8. 3
Local operation of the suppl y disconnectin g device to effect emergency
switch ing off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1 0. 9 En abling con trol d evice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1 1 Con trolgear: location , mounting, and enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1 1 . 1 General requiremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
–5–
1 1 . 2 Location and moun ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1 1 . 2. 1
Accessibility and main ten ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1 1 . 2. 2
Physical separation or grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1 1 . 2. 3
H eating effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
1 1 . 3 Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1 1 . 4 Enclosures, d oors and open ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1 1 . 5 Access to electrical equ ipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1 2 Cond uctors and cabl es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1 2. 1 General requiremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1 2. 2 Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1 2. 3 I nsul ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1 2. 4 Cu rren t-carrying capacity in n ormal service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
1 2. 5 Conductor an d cable vol tage d rop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1 2. 6 Fl exibl e cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1 2. 6. 1
1 2. 6. 2
M ech an ical rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1 2. 6. 3
Cu rren t-carrying capacity of cables wound on d ru ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
1 2. 7 Conductor wires, cond uctor bars and slip-ring assembl ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1 2. 7. 1
Basic protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1 2. 7. 2
Protective cond uctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1 2. 7. 3
Protective cond uctor curren t collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1 2. 7. 4
Removable cu rrent collectors with a d isconnector fu nction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1 2. 7. 5
Clearances in air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1 2. 7. 6
Creepage d istances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1 2. 7. 7
Conductor system section in g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1 2. 7. 8
Construction and installation of con ductor wire, conductor bar systems
and slip-ring assembl ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1 3 Wiring practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1 3. 1 Connections and rou ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1 3. 1 . 1
General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1 3. 1 . 2
Conductor an d cable runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1 3. 1 . 3
Conductors of differen t circu its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1 3. 1 . 4
AC circu its – El ectromagn etic effects (preven tion of ed d y curren ts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1 3. 1 . 5
Connection between pick-up and pick-up con verter of an in ductive
power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1 3. 2 I d en tification of con ductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1 3. 2. 1
1 3. 2. 2
I d en tification of the protective cond uctor / protective bond in g conductor . . . . . . . . 82
1 3. 2. 3
I d en tification of the neutral cond uctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1 3. 2. 4
I d en tification by colou r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
1 3. 3 Wiring insid e enclosu res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
1 3. 4 Wiring outsid e enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1 3. 4. 1
1 3. 4. 2
External d ucts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1 3. 4. 3
Connection to moving elemen ts of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1 3. 4. 4
I nterconnection of d evices on the mach in e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1 3. 4. 5
Plug/socket combin ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
1 3. 4. 6
Disman tling for shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1 3. 4. 7
Ad d itional conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
–6–
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
1 3. 5 Ducts, connection boxes and other boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1 3. 5. 1
General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1 3. 5. 2
Rigid metal condu it and fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1 3. 5. 3
Flexibl e metal cond uit an d fittin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1 3. 5. 4
Flexibl e non-metal lic cond uit and fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1 3. 5. 5
Cable tru nkin g systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1 3. 5. 6
M ach ine compartmen ts and cable tru nking systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1 3. 5. 7
Connection boxes and oth er boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1 3. 5. 8
M otor conn ection boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1 4 El ectric motors an d associated equ ipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1 4. 1 General requiremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1 4. 2 M otor enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
1 4. 3 M otor dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1 4. 4 M otor mounting and compartmen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1 4. 5 Criteria for motor sel ection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1 4. 6 Protective d evices for mechan ical brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1 5 Socket-ou tlets and ligh ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1 5. 1 Socket-ou tlets for accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1 5. 2 Local l igh ting of the mach in e and of th e equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1 5. 2. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1 5. 2. 2
Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1 5. 2. 3
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1 5. 2. 4
Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1 6 M arking, warning signs and reference d esignations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1 6. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1 6. 2 Warn ing signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1 6. 2. 1
Electric shock h azard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1 6. 2. 2
H ot surfaces h azard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1 6. 3 Functional id en tification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1 6. 4 M arking of enclosures of electrical eq uipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1 6. 5 Reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1 7 Technical d ocumen tation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1 7. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
1 7. 2 I n formation related to the electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1 8 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
1 8. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
1 8. 2 Verification of cond itions for protection by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y . . . . . . . 94
1 8. 2. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
1 8. 2. 2
Test 1 – Verification of th e con tinuity of the protective bond ing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1 8. 2. 3
Test 2 – Faul t l oop imped ance verification and suitability of the
associated overcurren t protective d evice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1 8. 2. 4
Appl ication of the test methods for TN -systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1 8. 3 I nsul ation resistance tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1 8. 4 Voltage tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
1 8. 5 Protection against resid u al voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
1 8. 6 Functional tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
1 8. 7 Retesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
An nex A (n ormative) Faul t protection by au tomatic d iscon nection of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
–7–
Faul t protection for machines suppl ied from TN -systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A. 1
A. 1 . 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A. 1 . 2
Cond itions for protection by automatic d isconnection of the suppl y by
overcurren t protective d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
A. 1 . 3
Cond ition for protection by red ucing th e touch voltage below 50 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 00
A. 1 . 4
Verification of cond itions for protection by automatic d iscon nection of
the suppl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 01
A. 2
Faul t protection for machines suppl ied from TT-systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03
A. 2. 1
Connection to earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03
A. 2. 2
Fau l t protection for TT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03
A. 2. 3
Verification of protection by au tomatic d isconnection of supply usin g a
residual curren t protective device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 04
A. 2. 4
M easuremen t of the fau lt l oop impedance ( Zs ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 05
An nex B (in formative) En qu iry form for the electrical equipmen t of machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 07
An nex C (informative) Examples of mach ines covered by th is part of I EC 60204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1
An nex D (informative) Cu rren t-carryin g capacity and overcurren t protection of
cond uctors and cabl es in the electrical equipmen t of machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3
D. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3
D. 2
General operating cond itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3
D. 2. 1
Ambien t air temperatu re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3
D. 2. 2
M eth od s of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3
D. 2. 3
Grou ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 5
D. 2. 4
Classification of cond uctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6
D. 3
Co-ord in ation between conductors an d protective d evices provid ing overload
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6
D. 4
Overcurrent protection of cond uctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 7
D. 5
Effect of harmon ic curren ts on balanced three-phase systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 8
An nex E (in formative) Explanation of emergency operation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 9
An nex F (in formative) Guid e for th e use of this part of I EC 60204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20
An nex G (in formative) Comparison of typical cond uctor cross-sectional areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 22
An nex H (informative) M easures to red uce the effects of electromagnetic influences . . . . . . . . . 1 24
H.1
Defin itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24
H.1 .1
apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24
H.1 .2
fixed installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24
H.2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24
H.3
M itigation of electromagn etic in terference (EM I ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24
H . 3. 1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24
H . 3. 2
M easures to red uce EM I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25
H.4
Separation and segregation of cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25
H.5
Power supply of a machin e by paral lel sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29
H.6
Su ppl y imped ance where a Power Drive System (PDS) is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29
An nex I (in formative) Docu men tation / I nformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 32
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
1
2
3
4
–
–
–
–
Bl ock d iagram of a typical mach ine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4
Disconnector isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Disconnecting circu it breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Example of eq uipoten tial bond in g for electrical equ ipmen t of a mach in e . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
–8–
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Figure 5 – Symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9: Protective earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 6 – Symbol I EC 6041 7-5020: Frame or chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 7 – Method a) Earth ed con trol circu it fed by a transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 8 – Method b1 ) N on-earthed control circu it fed by transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 9 – Method b2) N on-earthed control circu it fed by transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 1 0 – M eth od b3) N on-earthed con trol circuit fed by transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 1 1 – M eth od c) Con trol circu its fed by transformer with an earthed cen tre-tap
wind in g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 1 2 – M eth od d 1 a) Con trol circu it without transformer connected between a
phase and the neu tral of an earthed su ppl y system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 1 3 – M eth od d 1 b) Con trol circu it without transformer connected between two
phases of an earthed suppl y system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 1 4 – M eth od d 2a) Con trol circu it without transformer connected between phase
and n eu tral of a non-earthed su ppl y system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 1 5 – M eth od d 2b) con trol circu it withou t transformer connected between two
phases of a n on-earth ed supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 1 6 – Symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 1 7 – Symbol I EC 6041 7-5021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 1 8 – Symbol I SO 701 0-W01 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 1 9 – Symbol I SO 701 0-W01 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure A. 1 – Typical arran gement for fault loop imped ance ( Zs ) measuremen t in TN
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 02
Figure A. 2 – Typical arran gement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement for
power d rive system circuits in TN systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 02
Figure A. 3 – Typical arran gement for fault loop imped ance ( Zs ) measurement in TT
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 05
Figure A. 4 – Typical arran gement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement for
power d rive system circuits in TT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06
Figure D. 1 – M ethods of cond uctor an d cable instal lation in depen d en t of n umber of
cond uctors/cabl es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 4
Figure D. 2 – Parameters of cond uctors and protective d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6
Figure H . 1 – By-pass con d uctor for screen rein forcemen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25
Figure H . 2 – Examples of vertical separation an d segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 27
Figure H . 3 – Examples of h orizon tal separation and segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 27
Figure H . 4 – Cable arrangements in metal cabl e trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 28
Figure H . 5 – Connections between metal cable trays or cabl e trunking systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 28
Figure H . 6 – I n terru ption of metal cable trays at fire barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29
Table
Table
Table
Table
of the
Table
1 – M in imum cross-sectional area of copper protective cond uctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2 – Symbols for actu ators (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3 – Symbols for actu ators (M ach ine operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
4 – Colours for ind icator ligh ts and th eir meanings with respect to the cond ition
machin e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5 – M in imum cross-sectional areas of copper con ductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
–9–
Table 6 – Examples of cu rren t-carryin g capacity ( Iz ) of PVC insulated copper
cond uctors or cables und er stead y-state con ditions in an ambien t air temperature of
+ 40 °C for d ifferen t methods of instal lation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 7 – Derating factors for cables wound on d rums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 8 – M in imum permitted ben ding rad ii for the forced gu id ing of flexible cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 9 – Appl ication of th e test method s for TN -systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table 1 0 – Examples of maximum cable l engths from protective d evices to their load s
for TN -systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Table A. 1 – M aximu m d isconnecting times for TN systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Table A. 2 – M aximu m d isconnecting time for TT-systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 04
Table D. 1 – Correction factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3
Table D. 2 – Derating factors for Iz for grou ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 5
Table D. 3 – Derating factors for Iz for mu lticore cabl es up to 1 0 mm 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 5
Table D. 4 – Classification of con d uctors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6
Table D. 5 – M aximum al lowable conductor temperatures u nd er n ormal an d shortcircu it cond itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 7
Table F. 1 – Appl ication options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21
Table G. 1 – Comparison of cond uctor sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 22
Table H . 1 – M inimu m separation d istances usin g metallic contain men t as il lustrated in
Figure H . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 26
Table I . 1 – Documen tation / I n formation that can be applicable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 10 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
I N TERN ATI ON AL ELECTROTECH N I CAL COMMI SSI ON
____________
SAFETY OF MACHINERY –
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OF MACHINES –
Part 1 : General requirements
FOREWORD
1 ) Th e I n tern ati on al El ectrotech n i cal Com mi ssi on (I EC) i s a worl d wi d e org an i zati on for stan d ard i zati on com pri si n g
al l n ati on al el ectrotech n i cal com mi ttees (I EC N ati on al Com m i ttees). Th e obj ect of I EC i s to prom ote
i n tern ati on al co-operati on on al l q u esti on s con cern i n g stan d ard i zati on i n th e el ectrical an d el ectron i c fi el d s. To
th i s en d an d i n ad d i ti on to oth er acti vi ti es, I EC pu bl i sh es I n tern ati on al Stan d ard s, Tech n i cal Speci fi cati on s,
Tech n i cal Reports, Pu bl i cl y Avai l abl e Speci fi cati on s (PAS) an d G u i d es (h ereafter referred to as “I EC
Pu bl i cati on (s)”). Th ei r preparati on i s en tru sted to tech n ical com m i ttees; an y I EC N ati on al Com m i ttee i n terested
i n th e su bj ect d eal t wi th may parti ci pate i n th i s preparatory work. I n tern ati on al , g overn m en tal an d n on g overn m en tal org an izati on s l i ai si n g wi th th e I EC al so parti ci pate i n th i s preparati on . I EC col l aborates cl osel y
wi th th e I n tern ati on al Org an i zati on for Stan d ard i zati on (I SO) i n accord an ce wi th con d i ti on s d eterm i n ed by
ag reem en t between th e two org an i zati on s.
2) Th e form al d eci si on s or ag reem en ts of I EC on tech n i cal m atters express, as n earl y as possi bl e, an i n tern ati on al
con sen su s of opi n i on on th e rel evan t su bj ects si n ce each tech n i cal com m i ttee h as represen tati on from al l
i n terested I EC N ati on al Commi ttees.
3) I EC Pu bl i cati on s h ave th e form of recomm en d ati on s for i n tern ati on al u se an d are accepted by I EC N ati on al
Com m i ttees i n th at sen se. Wh i l e al l reason abl e efforts are m ad e to en su re th at th e tech n i cal con ten t of I EC
Pu bl i cati on s i s accu rate, I EC can n ot be h el d respon si bl e for th e way i n wh i ch th ey are u sed or for an y
m i si n terpretati on by an y en d u ser.
4) I n ord er to prom ote i n tern ati on al u n i formi ty, I EC N ati on al Com mi ttees u n d ertake to appl y I E C Pu bl i cati on s
tran sparen tl y to th e m axi m u m exten t possi bl e i n th ei r n ati on al an d reg i on al pu bl i cati on s. An y d i verg en ce
between an y I EC Pu bl i cati on an d th e correspon d i n g n ati on al or reg i on al pu bl i cati on sh al l be cl earl y i n d i cated i n
th e l atter.
5) I EC i tsel f d oes n ot provi d e an y attestati on of con form i ty. I n d epen d en t certi fi cati on bod i es provi d e con form i ty
assessmen t servi ces an d , i n som e areas, access to I EC m arks of con form i ty. I EC i s n ot respon si bl e for an y
servi ces carri ed ou t by i n d epen d en t certi fi cati on bod i es.
6) Al l u sers sh ou l d en su re th at th ey h ave th e l atest ed i ti on of th i s pu bl i cati on .
7) N o l i abi l i ty sh al l attach to I EC or i ts d i rectors, em pl oyees, servan ts or agen ts i n cl u d i n g i n d i vi d u al experts an d
m em bers of i ts tech n i cal com m i ttees an d I EC N ati on al Com m i ttees for an y person al i n j u ry, property d am ag e or
oth er d am age of an y n atu re wh atsoever, wh eth er d i rect or i n d i rect, or for costs (i n cl u d i n g l eg al fees) an d
expen ses ari si n g ou t of th e pu bl i cati on , u se of, or rel i an ce u pon , th i s I E C Pu bl i cati on or an y oth er I EC
Pu bl i cati on s.
8) Atten ti on i s d rawn to th e N orm ati ve referen ces ci ted i n th i s pu bl i cati on . U se of th e referen ced pu bl i cati on s i s
i n d i spen sabl e for th e correct appl i cati on of th i s pu bl i cati on .
9) Atten ti on i s d rawn to th e possi bi l i ty th at som e of th e el em en ts of th i s I EC Pu bl i cati on m ay be th e su bj ect of
paten t ri gh ts. I EC sh al l n ot be h el d respon si bl e for i d en ti fyi n g an y or al l su ch paten t ri g h ts.
I n tern ational Stand ard I EC 60204-1 has been prepared by I EC tech n ical committee 44: Safety
of machinery – Electrotech nical aspects.
This sixth ed ition cancel s and replaces the fifth ed ition publ ished in 2005. I t constitu tes a
technical revision .
This ed ition includ es th e fol lowing significant tech nical changes with respect to the previous
edition:
a)
b)
c)
d)
ad ded requiremen ts to ad d ress applications in volving power d rive systems (PDS);
revised electromagnetic compatibil ity (EM C) req uiremen ts;
clarified overcurrent protection requiremen ts;
requiremen ts for d etermination of th e short circuit current rating of th e electrical
equ ipment;
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 11 –
e) revised protective bon d in g requiremen ts an d terminology;
f) reorgan ization and revision to Clause 9, includ ing requ iremen ts pertain ing to safe torq ue
off of PDS, emergency stop, an d con trol circuit protection;
g) revised symbols for actuators of con trol d evices;
h) revised techn ical d ocu men tation requ iremen ts;
i) general upd ating to curren t special n ational cond itions, n ormative stand ards, and
bibliographical references.
The text of th is stand ard is based on the foll owing documen ts:
FDI S
Report on voti n g
44/765/FDI S
44/771 /RVD
Full in formation on the votin g for the approval of th is stan d ard can be fou nd in the report on
votin g ind icated in the above table.
This publ ication has been drafted in accord ance with th e I SO/I EC Directives, Part 2.
A l ist of all parts in th e I EC 60204 series, published un d er the general titl e
machinery – Electrical equipment of machines , can be foun d on the I EC website.
Safety of
The fol lowing d iffering practices of a less permanen t nature exist in the countries ind icated
below.
4. 3. 1 :
The voltage ch aracteristics of electricity su pplied by public d istribution systems in
Europe are given in EN 501 60: 201 0.
5. 1 :
Exception is not all owed (U SA).
5. 1 :
TN -C systems are not permitted in low-vol tage installations in bu il dings (N orway).
5. 2:
Terminals for the conn ection of th e protective earthing conductors may be
id entified by th e colour green , the letters “G” or “GR” or “GRD” or “GN D”, or th e
word “ground ” or “ground in g”, or with the graphical symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9: 200608 or any combination (U SA).
6. 3. 3 b), 1 3. 4. 5 b), 1 8. 2. 1 :
TT power systems are not al lowed (U SA).
6. 3. 3, 1 8. 2, An nex A:
TN systems are not used . TT systems are the n ational stan d ard
(J apan).
6. 3. 3 b):
The use of resid u al curren t protective d evices with a rated resid ual operating
curren t not exceed in g 1 A is man d atory in TT systems as a means for fau lt
protection by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y (I tal y).
7. 2. 3:
Discon nection of th e neu tral conductor is man d atory in a TN -S system (France
and N orway).
7. 2. 3:
Th ird paragraph : d istribu tion of a n eutral cond uctor with an I T system is not
al lowed (U SA and N orway).
7. 1 0:
For evalu ation of short circuit ratings the requ iremen ts of U L 508A Suppl emen t
SB, may be used (U SA).
8. 2. 2:
See I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 , An nex E List of notes concerning certain countries.
9. 1 . 2:
M aximu m n ominal AC control circuit vol tage is 1 20 V (U SA).
1 2. 2:
Onl y stran d ed conductors are allowed on machines, except for 0, 2 mm 2 solid
cond uctors with in encl osu res (U SA).
1 2. 2:
The smallest power circu it cond uctor allowed on machines is 0, 82 mm 2 (AWG 1 8)
in mu l ticonductor cables or in enclosu res (U SA).
Table 5:
Cross-section al area is specified in N FPA 79 usin g American Wire Gauge (AWG)
(U SA). See An nex G.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 12 –
1 3. 2. 2:
1 3. 2. 3:
1 5. 2. 2:
1 5. 2. 2:
1 6. 4:
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
For the protective conductor, the colour iden tification GREEN (with or withou t
YELLOW stripes) is used as equ ivalen t to the bicolour combination GREEN -AN DYELLOW (U SA an d Canad a).
The colour id en tification WH I TE or GREY is used for earthed neu tral cond uctors
instead of the col our id en tification BLU E (U SA and Can ad a).
First paragraph : M aximum valu e between cond uctors 1 50 V (U SA).
Second paragraph , 5 th bullet: Th e fu l l load curren t ratin g of ligh tin g circu its d oes
n ot exceed 1 5 A (U SA).
N ameplate marking requ iremen ts (U SA).
A. 2. 2. 2:
The permissible maximum value of R A is regu lated (e. g. when U o ≥ 300V, R A shall
be less than 1 0 Ω , when Uo < 300 V, R A shal l be less th an 1 00 Ω , Uo is the
nomin al AC l ine to earth vol tage in volts (V) (J apan ).
A. 2. 2. 2:
The maximum permissible value of R A is 83 Ω (N etherlands).
The committee h as d ecid ed that th e con ten ts of th is pu bl ication will remain unchan ged u n til
th e stability date ind icated on the I EC website u nd er "http: //webstore. iec. ch" in the d ata
rel ated to the specific publication . At th is d ate, the publication wil l be
•
•
•
•
recon firmed ,
withd rawn,
replaced by a revised ed ition , or
amend ed .
IMPORTANT – The 'colour inside' logo on the cover page of this publication indicates
that it contains colours which are considered to be useful for the correct
understanding of its contents. Users should therefore print this document using a
colour printer.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 13 –
I N TRODU CTI ON
This part of I EC 60204 provides requiremen ts and recommend ations relating to the electrical
equ ipmen t of machin es so as to promote:
–
–
–
safety of persons an d property;
consistency of control response;
ease of operation an d main tenance.
M ore gu id ance on th e use of this part of I EC 60204 is given in An nex F.
Figure 1 h as been provid ed as an aid to the un derstand ing of th e inter-relationship of the
various elemen ts of a machin e and its associated eq uipmen t. Figure 1 is a block d iagram of a
typical mach ine and associated equipmen t showing the various elemen ts of th e el ectrical
equ ipmen t ad d ressed in th is part of I EC 60204. N u mbers in paren theses ( ) refer to Clauses
and Su bclauses in this part of I EC 60204. I t is un d erstood in Figure 1 that all of the elemen ts
taken togeth er includ ing th e safeguard s, tool ing/fixturing, software, and th e documentation ,
constitu te the mach in e, and th at one or more mach in es working together with usuall y at least
one level of su pervisory con trol constitu te a manufacturin g cel l or system.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 14 –
Physical
environment
(4.4)
Power supply
(4.3)
PE
(External protective
conductor connection)
Conductors and
cables
(Clause 1 2)
Wiring
practices
(Clause 1 3)
Verification
(Clause 1 8)
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Warning signs, item designation
(Clause 1 6)
Technical documentation
(Clause 1 7)
Supply disconnecting device
(5.3)
Protection against electrical shock
(Clause 6)
Protection of equipment
(Clause 7)
Earth (PE) terminal
(5.2)
Protective bonding circuit
(8.2)
Control circuits and control functions
(Clause 9)
Emergency operations
(9.2.2.4)
Controlgear
(Clause 1 1 )
Accessories and lighting
(Clause 1 5)
System/cell
controller
Data link
Emergency
stop device
(1 0.7)
Motor
control equipment
Motors
(Clause 1 4) and
transducers
Programmable
controller
Operator control
station
(Clause 1 0)
Input/output
interface
Safeguards and
warning devices
Actuators and
sensors
Processing equipment
IEC
Figu re 1 – Block diagram of a typical machine
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 15 –
SAFETY OF MACHINERY –
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OF MACHINES –
Part 1 : General requirements
1
Scope
This part of I EC 60204 applies to electrical, electronic and programmabl e electron ic
equ ipment an d systems to mach in es n ot portable by han d while workin g, includ in g a grou p of
mach in es working togeth er in a co-ordinated man ner.
N OTE 1 Th i s part of I EC 602 04 i s an appl i cati on stan d ard an d i s n ot i n ten d ed to l i mi t or i n h i bi t tech n ol og i cal
ad van cem en t.
N OTE 2 I n th i s part of I EC 60204, th e term “el ectri cal ” in cl u d es el ectri cal , el ectron i c an d prog ram m abl e el ectron i c
m atters (i . e. “el ectri cal eq u i pmen t” m ean s el ectri cal , el ectron i c an d prog ramm abl e el ectron i c eq u i pm en t).
N OTE 3 I n th e con text of th i s part of I E C 60204, th e term “person ” refers to an y i n d i vi d u al an d i n cl u d es th ose
person s wh o are assi g n ed an d i n stru cted by th e u ser or h i s agen t(s) i n th e u se an d care of th e m ach i n e i n
q u esti on .
The eq uipmen t covered by th is part of I EC 60204 commences at th e point of connection of the
supply to the electrical equ ipment of th e machine (see 5. 1 ).
N OTE 4 Th e req u i rem en ts for th e el ectri cal su ppl y i n stal l ation are gi ven i n th e I EC 60364 seri es.
This part of I EC 60204 is appl icabl e to the electrical equipment or parts of the electrical
equ ipmen t th at operate with nominal supply vol tages not exceed ing 1 000 V for al ternatin g
curren t (AC) and not exceed ing 1 500 V for direct curren t (DC), and with nominal supply
frequ encies n ot exceed in g 200 H z.
N OTE 5 I n form ati on on el ectri cal eq u i pm en t or parts of th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t th at operate wi th h i g h er n om i n al
su ppl y vol tag es can be fou n d i n I EC 60204-1 1 .
This part of I EC 60204 d oes not cover all the requiremen ts (for example guard ing,
in terl ocking, or con trol) that are n eed ed or requ ired by oth er stand ards or regul ations in ord er
to protect persons from hazard s oth er than electrical h azards. Each type of mach in e has
u nique req uiremen ts to be accommodated to provid e ad equ ate safety.
Th is part of I EC 60204 specifical ly includ es, bu t is n ot l imited to, th e electrical eq u ipmen t of
mach in es as d efined in 3. 1 . 40.
N OTE 6 An n ex C l i sts exam pl es of mach i n es wh ose el ectri cal eq u i pm en t can be covered by th i s part of
I EC 602 04.
This part of I EC 60204 does not specify ad d itional and special requ iremen ts that can appl y to
th e electrical eq uipmen t of mach ines th at, for example:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
are in tended for use in open air (i. e. ou tsid e build ings or other protective structures);
use, process, or prod uce poten tial ly expl osive material (for example paint or sawdust);
are intend ed for use in potentiall y explosive and /or flammable atmosph eres;
h ave special risks wh en prod ucing or usin g certain materials;
are intend ed for use in mines;
are sewin g mach in es, un its, and systems (wh ich are covered by I EC 60204-31 );
are h oistin g mach ines (wh ich are covered by I EC 60204-32);
are semicond uctor fabrication eq uipmen t (which are covered by I EC 60204-33).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 16 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Power circuits where electrical energy is directly used as a workin g tool are exclud ed from
th is part of I EC 60204.
2

Normative references
The following d ocumen ts, in whole or in part, are n ormativel y referenced in this d ocumen t and
are in dispensable for its appl ication. For d ated references, on ly the ed ition cited applies. For
u nd ated references, th e latest ed ition of th e referenced d ocu men t (includ ing an y
amendmen ts) appl ies.
NOTE
In CENELEC, Annex ZA applies instead of Clause 2.
I EC 60034-1 ,
Rotating electrical machines – Part 1: Rating and performance
I EC 60072 (all parts),
I EC 60309-1 ,
requirements

Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines
Plugs, socket-outlets, and couplers for industrial purposes – Part 1: General
Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 1: Fundamental principles,
assessment of general characteristics, definitions
I EC 60364-1 ,
Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 4-41: Protection for safety –
Protection against electric shock
I EC 60364-4-41 : 2005,
I EC 60364-4-43: 2008, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 4-43: Protection for safety –
Protection against overcurrent
I EC 60364-5-52: 2009, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 5-52: Selection and erection
of electrical equipment – Wiring systems
I EC 60364-5-53: 2001 , Electrical installations of buildings – Part 5-53: Selection and erection
of electrical equipment – Isolation, switching and control
I EC 60364-5-53: 2001 /AM D1 : 2002
Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 5-54: Selection and erection
of electrical equipment – Earthing arrangements and protective conductors
I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 ,
I EC 6041 7, Graphical symbols
symbols. in fo/equ ipment
for use on equipment. Avail able from: h ttp: //www. graph ical-
Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
identification – Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and conductors
I EC 60445: 201 0,
I EC 60529,
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems – Part 1:
Principles, requirements and tests
I EC 60664-1 ,
I EC 60947-2,
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 2: Circuit-breakers
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 3: Switches, disconnectors,
switch-disconnectors, and fuse-combination units
I EC 60947-3,
I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5-1: Control circuit
devices and switching elements – Electromechanical control circuit devices
I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003/AM D1 : 2009
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 17 –
I EC 60947-5-5, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5-5: Control circuit devices
and switching elements – Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 6-2: Multiple function
equipment – Control and protective switching devices(or equipment) (CPS)
I EC 60947-6-2,
Protection against electric shock – Common aspects for installation and
I EC 61 1 40,
equipment
I EC 61 31 0 (all parts),
I EC 61 439-1 ,
Safety of machinery – Indication, marking and actuation
Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 1: General rules
Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar
products – Part 1: General requirements and tests
I EC 61 558-1 : 2005,
I EC 61 558-1 : 2005/AM D1 : 2009
I EC 61 558-2-6, Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for
supply voltages up to 1 100 V – Part 2-6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating
transformers and power supply units incorporating safety isolating transformers
I EC 61 984,
Connectors – Safety requirements and tests
I EC 62023,
Structuring of technical information and documentation
I EC 62061 , Safety of machinery – Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and
programmable electronic control systems
I SO 701 0: 201 1 ,
signs
Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Registered safety
I SO 1 3849-1 , Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems – Part 1: General
principles for design
I SO 1 3849-2,
Validation
Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems – Part 2:
I SO 1 3850: 2006,
3
3.1
Safety of machinery – Emergency stop function – Principles for design
Terms,definitions and abbreviated terms
Terms and definitions
For th e purposes of th is d ocument, th e foll owing terms and d efin itions appl y.
3.1 .1
actuator
part of a d evice to which an external action is to be appl ied
N ote 1 to en try:
Th e actu ator m ay take th e form of a h an d l e, kn ob, pu sh -bu tton , rol l er, pl u n g er, etc.
N ote 2 to en try: Th ere are som e actu ati n g m ean s th at d o n ot req u i re an extern al actu ati n g force, bu t on l y an
acti on , e. g. tou ch screen s.
N ote 3 to en try:
See al so 3. 1 . 39.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 18 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
3. 1 .2
ambien t tem peratu re
temperatu re of the air or other med ium where the equ ipmen t is to be used
3. 1 .3
barrier
part provid ing protection against con tact with live parts from any usual d irection of access
3. 1 .4
basi c protecti on
protection against electric shock under faul t-free cond itions
N ote 1 to en try:
Previ ou sl y referred to as “protecti on agai n st d i rect con tact”
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-01 , mod ified – The n ote h as been ad d ed . ]
3. 1 .5
cable tray
cable support consistin g of a contin uous base and raised ed ges and no covering
N ote 1 to en try:
A cabl e tray m ay be perforated or n on -perforated .
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 5-08]
3. 1 .6
cable tru nkin g system
system of cl osed encl osu res comprising a base with a removabl e cover in tended for the
complete surroun ding of insu lated con ductors or cabl es
3. 1 .7
con cu rren t
occurring or operating at the same time (bu t not necessarily synchronously)
3. 1 . 8
con du ctor wire
cond uctor bar
cond uctive wire or bar of a feed er system with a slid ing curren t col lector
3. 1 .9
con du it
part of a closed wirin g system of circu lar or non -circu lar cross-section for insu lated
cond uctors and /or cables in electrical install ations
N ote 1 to en try: Con d u i ts sh ou l d be su ffi ci en tl y cl ose-j oi n ted so th at th e i n su l ated con d u ctors an d /or cabl es can
on l y be d rawn i n an d n ot i n serted l ateral l y.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-442: 1 998, 442-02-03, mod ified – Th e d efinition has been amen ded and
th e note has been ad d ed . ]
3. 1 .1 0
control circu i t , < of a machine >
circu it used for the control, includ in g mon i torin g, of a machine and the electrical equ ipmen t
3. 1 .1 1
control devi ce
d evice connected in to the con trol circu it and used for con trolling the operation of th e mach in e
EXAM PLE Positi on sen sor, m an u al con trol swi tch , rel ay, con tactor, m ag n eti cal l y operated val ve.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 19 –
3. 1 .1 2
control stati on
operator con trol station
assembl y of one or more con trol actu ators (see 3. 1 . 1 ) fixed on th e same pan el or located in
th e same enclosu re
N ote 1 to en try: A con trol stati on m ay al so con tai n rel ated eq u i pm en t, for exam pl e, poten ti om eters, si gn al l amps,
i n stru m en ts, d i spl ay d evi ces, etc.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-441 : 1 984, 441 -1 2-08, mod ified – The second preferred term h as been
add ed , the word "switch es" has been replaced by "actuators" in the d efinition and the n ote
h as been ad d ed . ]
3. 1 .1 3
con trol gear
switching d evices and their combin ation with associated con trol , measurin g, protective, and
regulatin g equipment, also assemblies of such d evices an d equ ipmen t with associated
intercon nections, accessories, enclosu res, an d su pporting structures, in tend ed in principle for
th e control of electrical en ergy consuming equ ipmen t
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-441 : 1 984, 441 -1 1 -03]
3. 1 .1 4
con trol l ed stop
stopping of mach ine motion with power to the machine actuators main tain ed d uring th e
stopping process
3. 1 .1 5
d i rect con tact
contact of persons or livestock with live parts
N ote 1 to en try:
See 3. 1 . 4.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-03, mod ified – The n ote h as been ad d ed . ]
3. 1 .1 6
di rect open i n g action , < of a contact elemen t >
achievement of con tact separation as the d irect resul t of a specified movemen t of the switch
actuator throu gh n on-resil ien t members (for example not d epend ent upon springs)
[SOU RCE: I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003, K. 2. 2]
3. 1 . 1 7
du ct
enclosed channel d esign ed expressl y for hold ing and protecting electrical con d uctors, cables,
and busbars
N ote 1 to en try:
d u ct.
Con d u i ts (see 3. 1 . 9), cabl e tru n ki n g system s (see 3. 1 . 6) an d u n d erfl oor ch an n el s are types of
3. 1 .1 8
earth
l ocal earth
g rou n d (U S)
l ocal grou nd (U S)
part of the Earth which is in el ectric con tact with an earth electrod e and th e electrical poten tial
of which is not necessarily equal to zero
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-01 -03]
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 20 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
3. 1 .1 9
el ectrical operatin g area
room or location for electrical equ ipmen t to wh ich access is intended to be restricted to skilled
or instructed persons, by th e open ing of a d oor or the removal of a barrier without the use of a
key or tool, and wh ich is clearl y marked by appropriate warning signs
3. 1 .20
el ectron ic equ ipment
part of the electrical equ ipmen t contain in g circuitry d epend ent for its operation on electron ic
d evices an d componen ts
3. 1 .21
emergen cy stop devi ce
man uall y actuated control device used to initiate an emergency stop function
N ote 1 to en try:
See 9. 2. 3. 4. 2.
[SOU RCE: I SO 1 3850: 2006, 3. 2, mod ified – The n ote has been ad ded . ]
3. 1 .22
emergen cy swi tch in g off devi ce
man uall y actuated control d evice used to switch off or to initiate the switchin g off of the su ppl y
of el ectrical energy to al l or a part of an installation wh ere a risk of el ectric sh ock or anoth er
risk of el ectrical origin is involved
N ote 1 to en try:
See 9. 2. 3. 4. 3.
3. 1 .23
encl osed electri cal operatin g area
room or location for electrical equ ipmen t to wh ich access is intended to be restricted to skilled
or instructed persons by the use of a key or tool to open a door, or remove a barrier, an d
wh ich is clearly marked by appropriate warnin g signs
3. 1 .24
encl osu re
part provid ing protection of equ ipmen t against certain extern al in flu ences and , in an y
d irection, basic protection as protection against d irect con tact
N ote 1 to en try: Th e exi sti n g d efi n i ti on taken from th e I EV n eed s th e fol l owi n g expl an ati on s wi th i n th e scope of
th i s part of I E C 60204:
a)
En cl osu res provi d e protecti on of person s or l i vestock ag ai n st access to h azard ou s parts.
b)
Barri ers, sh aped open i n gs, or an y oth er m ean s su i tabl e to preven t or l i mi t th e pen etrati on of th e speci fi ed test
probes, wh eth er attach ed to th e en cl osu re or form ed by th e en cl osed eq u i pm en t, are con sid ered as part of th e
en cl osu re, except wh ere th ey can be removed wi th ou t th e u se of a key or tool .
c)
An en cl osu re may be:
–
a cabi n et or box, ei th er m ou n ted on th e m ach i n e or separate from th e mach i n e;
–
a com partmen t con si sti n g of an en cl osed space wi th i n th e m ach i n e stru ctu re.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-02-35, mod ified – The d efinition has been amen d ed . ]
3. 1 .25
el ectrical eq u ipm en t
items used in con nection with the util isation of electricity by mach in es or parts of machin es,
for exampl e material, fittings, d evices, componen ts, appl iances, fixtures, apparatus, and
similar
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
3. 1 .26
equ i potential bon di ng
provision of electric
equ ipoten tial ity
connections
– 21 –
between
cond uctive
parts,
in tend ed
to
achieve
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-01 -1 0]
3. 1 .27
exposed con du cti ve part
conductive part of electrical equipmen t, which can be touched and wh ich is not live und er
normal operatin g con d itions, bu t which can become live un der fau lt con d iti ons
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-1 0, mod ified – The d efinition has been amen d ed . ]
3. 1 .28
extran eou s-con du cti ve-part
conductive part not formin g part of the electrical instal lation an d liable to in trod uce an electric
poten tial , gen eral l y the electric potential of a local earth
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-1 1 ]
3. 1 . 29
fai l u re
termination of the ability of an item to perform a requ ired function
N ote 1 to en try:
After fai l u re, th e i tem h as a fau l t.
N ote 2 to en try:
"Fai l u re" i s an even t, as d i sti n g u i sh ed from "fau l t", wh i ch i s a state.
N ote 3 to en try:
Th i s con cept as d efi n ed d oes n ot appl y to i tem s con si sti n g of software on l y.
N ote 4 to en try:
I n practi ce, th e term s fau l t an d fai l u re are often u sed syn on ym ou sl y.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 91 : 1 990, 1 91 -04-01 ]
3. 1 .30
fau l t
state of an item characterized by inabil ity to perform a requ ired function , exclu d ing the
inabil ity d urin g preven tive main tenance or other planned actions, or due to l ack of extern al
resources
N ote 1 to en try:
A fau l t i s often th e resu l t of a fai l u re of th e i tem i tsel f, bu t m ay exi st wi th ou t pri or fai l u re.
N ote 2 to en try: I n En gl i sh , th e term “fau l t” an d i ts d efi n i ti on are i d en tical wi th th ose g i ven i n I EC 60050-1 91 : 1 990,
1 91 -05-01 . I n th e fi el d of m ach i n ery, th e Fren ch term “d éfau t” an d th e G erm an term “Feh l er” are u sed rath er th an
th e term s “pan n e” an d “Feh l zu stan d ” th at appear wi th th i s d efi n i ti on .
3. 1 .31
fau lt protecti on
protection against electric shock und er single-fault cond itions
N ote 1 to en try:
Previ ou sl y referred to as “protecti on agai n st i n d i rect con tact”
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-02, mod ified – the N ote has been ad d ed ]
3. 1 .32
fu nctional bon d in g
equ ipoten tial bond ing necessary for proper functioning of electrical equipmen t
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 22 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
3. 1 .33
h azard
poten tial sou rce of ph ysical inj ury or d amage to h eal th
N ote 1 to en try: Th e term h azard can be q u al i fi ed i n ord er to d efi n e i ts ori gi n (for exampl e, m ech an i cal h azard ,
el ectri cal h azard ) or th e n atu re of th e poten ti al h arm (for exam pl e, el ectri c sh ock h azard , cu tti n g h azard , toxi c
h azard , fi re h azard ).
N ote 2 to en try:
Th e h azard en vi sag ed i n th i s d efi n i ti on :
–
ei th er is perman en tl y presen t d u ri n g th e i n ten d ed u se of th e m ach i n e (for exam pl e moti on of h azard ou s movi n g
el emen ts, el ectri c arc d u ri n g a wel d i n g ph ase, u n h eal th y postu re, n oise emi ssi on , h i g h tem peratu re);
–
or can appear u n expected l y (for exam pl e: expl osi on , cru sh i n g h azard as a con seq u en ce of an
u n i n ten d ed /u n expected start-u p, ej ecti on as a con seq u en ce of a breakag e, fal l as a con seq u en ce of
accel erati on /d ecel erati on ).
[SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 6, mod ified – The word “harm" has been replaced by " ph ysical
in jury or damage to h eal th " in the defin ition and N ote 3 h as been removed ]
3. 1 .34
i n direct con tact
con tact of persons or livestock with exposed con d uctive parts wh ich have become l ive u nder
faul t cond itions
N ote 1 to en try:
See 3. 1 . 31 .
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-04, mod ified – The d efinition has been amen d ed . ]
3. 1 .35
i n du cti ve power su pply system
system of ind uctive power transfer, consisting of a track con verter and a track conductor,
along wh ich on e or more pick-u p(s) an d associated pick-up con verter(s) can move, withou t
an y gal van ic or mech anical con tact, in ord er to transfer el ectrical power for example to a
mobile machine
N ote 1 to en try:
respecti vel y.
Th e track con d u ctor an d th e pi ck-u p are an al ogou s to th e pri mary an d secon d ary of a tran sform er
3. 1 .36
i n stru cted person , < in electricity >
person ad equ ately ad vised or supervised by an el ectricall y skil led person to enable h im or her
to perceive risks an d to avoid hazard s wh ich electricity can create
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 8-02, mod ified – “an electricall y skilled person” has
been used to replace “electricall y skil led persons”]
3. 1 .37
i n terl ock
arrangemen t of d evices operatin g together to:
•
preven t hazard ous situations, or
•
preven t d amage to equipmen t or material , or
•
preven t specified operations, or
•
ensure correct operations
3. 1 .38
l i ve part
cond uctor or cond uctive part in tend ed to be energized in normal use, inclu ding a n eu tral
cond uctor, bu t, by con ven tion, not a PEN con ductor
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 23 –
3.1 .39
machine actuator
power mech an ism of th e machine used to effect motion (for example, motor, solenoid ,
pneu matic or h ydraulic cylind er)
3.1 .40
machinery
machine
assembl y of linked parts or compon en ts, at least one of wh ich moves, with the appropriate
mach in e actuators, con trol and power circu its, join ed togeth er for a specific appl ication , in
particu lar for th e processing, treatment, moving or packaging of a material
N ote 1 to en try: Th e term "mach i n ery" al so covers an assem bl y of m ach i n es wh i ch , i n ord er to ach i eve th e sam e
en d , are arran ged an d con trol l ed so th at th ey fu n cti on as an i n teg ral wh ol e.
N ote 2 to en try:
com pon en ts.
Th e term "com pon en t" i s u sed h ere i n a g en eral sen se an d i t d oes n ot refer on l y to el ectri cal
[SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 1 , modified – The d efinition h as been amen d ed and N ote 2
referrin g to an Ann ex has been removed an d replaced by the presen t N ote 2 to entry. ]
3.1 .41
marking
signs or inscriptions primaril y for the purpose of id entifying equ ipmen t, components and /or
d evices
3.1 .42
neutral conductor
N
conductor el ectrical ly connected to th e neu tral poin t and capable of con tributing to the
d istribution of el ectrical energy
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-02-06]
3.1 .43
obstacle
part preven tin g un in ten tional d irect con tact with l ive parts, but n ot preventin g d irect con tact by
d el iberate action
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-1 6, mod ified – The word s “(electricall y) protective”
have been removed from the term. ]
3.1 .44
overcurrent
cu rren t exceed ing the rated value
N ote 1 to en try:
For con d u ctors, th e rated val u e i s con si d ered as eq u al to th e cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ty.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 1 -1 4, mod ified – The d efinition has been amen d ed . ]
3.1 .45
overload of a circuit
time/curren t rel ationsh ip in a circu it wh ich is in excess of the rated full load of the circu it when
th e circu it is n ot un der a faul t cond ition
N ote 1 to en try:
Overl oad sh ou l d n ot be u sed as a syn on ym for overcu rren t.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 24 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
3. 1 .46
pl u g /socket combi nation
componen t and a su itable matin g componen t, appropriate to terminate conductors, in tended
for con nection or d isconn ection of two or more con ductors
N ote 1 to en try:
Exam pl es of pl u g/socket com bi n ati on i n cl u d e:
–
con n ectors wh i ch fu l fi l th e req u i rem en ts of I EC 61 984;
–
a pl u g an d socket-ou tl et, a cabl e cou pl er, or an appl i an ce cou pl er i n accord an ce wi th I EC 60309-1 ;
–
a pl u g an d socket-ou tl et i n accord an ce wi th I EC 60884-1 or an appl i an ce cou pl er i n accord an ce wi th
I EC 60320-1 .
3. 1 .47
power ci rcu i t
circu it that su pplies power to u nits of equ ipmen t used for prod uctive operation and to
transformers supplying con trol circu its
3. 1 .48
prospecti ve short-ci rcu i t cu rrent
Icp
r. m. s. value of th e curren t wh ich woul d fl ow wh en th e suppl y cond uctors to the el ectrical
equ ipmen t are short-circu ited by a cond uctor of n egligible impedance l ocated as near as
practicable to the su ppl y terminals of th e electrical equ ipment
[SOU RCE: I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 3. 8. 7, mod ified – “assembly” h as been replaced by “el ectrical
equ ipmen t”]
3. 1 .49
protecti ve bon d in g
equ ipotential bond ing for protection against electric shock
N ote 1 to en try:
M easu res for protecti on ag ai n st el ectri c sh ock can al so red u ce th e ri sk of bu rn s or fi re.
N ote 2 to en try: Protecti ve bon d i n g can be ach i eved wi th protecti ve con d u ctors an d protecti ve bon d i n g con d u ctors
an d by con d u cti ve j oi n i n g of con d u cti ve parts of th e m ach i n e an d i ts el ectri cal eq u i pm en t.
3. 1 .50
protecti ve bon d in g ci rcu it
protective conductors an d conductive parts connected togeth er to provid e protection against
electric shock in th e even t of an insul ation failu re
3. 1 .51
protecti ve cond u ctor
cond uctor provid ing a primary faul t curren t path from the exposed cond uctive parts of the
electrical equ ipmen t to a protective earth ing (PE) terminal
3. 1 .52
redu n dan cy
application of more than on e d evice or system, or part of a d evice or system, with the
obj ective of ensuring that in the even t of one fail ing to perform its fu nction , an other is
availabl e to perform that fu nction
3. 1 .53
referen ce design ati on
d istinctive code wh ich serves to id en tify an object in th e docu men tation and on the eq uipmen t
3. 1 .54
ri sk
combin ation of th e probabil ity of occu rrence of harm (i. e. physical in jury or d amage to h eal th)
and the severity of that harm
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 25 –
[SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 1 2, modified – The text in paren theses has been add ed ]
3. 1 . 55
safegu ard
guard or protective d evice provid ed as a means to protect persons from a h azard
[SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 26, mod ified – The word s “provid ed as a means to protect
persons from a hazard ” have been ad d ed . ]
3. 1 .56
safegu ardi ng
protective measure using safeguards to protect persons from th e h azard s wh ich cann ot
reasonabl y be el iminated or from the risks which can not be su fficien tly red uced by in heren tly
safe d esign measures
[SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 21 ]
3. 1 .57
safety fu n cti on
fu nction of a mach in e whose failure can resul t in an immed iate increase of th e risk(s)
[SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 30; I EC 62061 : 2005, 3. 2. 1 5]
3. 1 .58
servi ci n g l evel
level on which persons stand wh en operating or main tainin g th e electrical equipmen t
3. 1 .59
sh ort-ci rcu it cu rrent
overcurren t resu l ting from a short-circuit d ue to a fau lt or an incorrect conn ection in an
electric circuit
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-441 : 1 984, 441 -1 1 -07]
3. 1 . 60
sh ort-ci rcu it cu rren t rati n g
valu e of prospective short-circuit curren t that can be withstood by the electrical equ ipment for
th e total operating time (clearin g time) of th e sh ort-circu it protective d evice (SCPD) und er
specified con d itions
[SOU RCE: I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 3. 8. 1 0. 4, mod ified – The word “rated” is removed from the
term, and the reference to “assembl y” removed from the definition . ]
3. 1 .61
ski l led person
el ectrical l y ski l led person
person with rel evan t train in g, ed ucation and experience to en able him or h er to perceive risks
and to avoid h azard s associated with electricity
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 8-01 , mod ified – Th e parentheses h ave been removed
and “training” has been ad d ed . ]
3. 1 .62
su ppl ier
en tity (for example manu facturer, con tractor, instal ler, in tegrator) who provides equ ipmen t or
services associated with th e mach ine
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 26 –
N ote 1 to en try:
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Th e u ser org an i zati on m ay al so act i n th e capaci ty of a su ppl i er to i tsel f.
3.1 .63
switching device
d evice design ed to make and /or break the curren t in one or more electric circuits
N ote 1 to en try:
A swi tch i n g d evi ce m ay perform on e or both of th ese acti on s.
[SOU RCE: I EC 60050-441 : 1 984, 441 -1 4-01 ]
3.1 .64
uncontrolled stop
stopping of mach in e motion by removing electrical power to th e mach ine actuators
N ote 1 to en try: Th i s d efi n i ti on d oes n ot i m pl y an y parti cu l ar state of oth er stoppi n g d evi ces, for exam pl e
m ech an i cal or h yd rau l i c brakes.
3.1 .65
user
en tity who util izes the mach in e an d its associated electrical equ ipment
3.2
Abbreviated terms
AWG
AC
BDM
CCS
DC
EM C
EM I
I FLS
MMI
PDS
PELV
RCD
SPD
SCPD
SELV
SLP
STO
American Wire Gau ge
Al tern ating Cu rren t
Basic Drive M od ul e
Cabl eless Control System
Direct Current
El ectro-Magn etic Compatibil ity
El ectro-Magnetic I nterference
I nsul ation Fault Location System
M an-M achine interface
Power Drive System
Protective Extra-Low Voltage
Resid ual Curren t protective Device
Surge Protective Devices
Sh ort-Circu it Protective Device
Safe Extra-Low Vol tage
Safel y-Limited Position
Safe Torqu e Off
4 General requirements
4.1
General
Th is stand ard specifies requiremen ts for the electrical equipmen t of mach in es.
The risks associated with th e hazards rel evant to th e electrical equipmen t shall be assessed
as part of the overall requiremen ts for risk assessmen t of the mach in e. This will :
–
–
–
id entify the n eed for risk red uction ; an d
d etermine ad equ ate risk red uctions; and
d etermine the necessary protective measures
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 27 –
for persons who can be exposed to th ose hazard s, while still main tain in g an appropriate
performance of the machine and its eq uipmen t.
H azard ous situations can resu lt from, bu t are not l imited to, the following causes:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
failures or faul ts in the electrical equipmen t resu lting in the possibility of electric sh ock,
arc, or fire;
failures or faults in control circu its (or componen ts an d d evices associated with those
circu its) resu lting in the mal functioning of th e mach in e;
d istu rbances or d isruptions in power sources as wel l as failures or fau l ts in the power
circu its resulting in the mal fu nction ing of the machine;
loss of con tin uity of circu its that can resul t in a failu re of a safety function , for example
th ose that depen d on slid in g or roll ing con tacts;
electrical d isturbances for example, electromagn etic, electrostatic eith er from outsid e the
electrical eq uipment or in ternall y generated , resulting in the malfu nction ing of the
mach in e;
release of stored energy (either electrical or mech an ical) resu l ting in, for exampl e, electric
sh ock, un expected movement that can cause injury;
acoustic noise and mechan ical vibration at levels that cause h eal th problems to persons;
su rface temperatures that can cause in ju ry.
Safety measu res are a combination of th e measures incorporated at th e d esign stage an d
th ose measu res requ ired to be implemen ted by th e user.
The d esign and d evelopmen t process shal l id entify hazard s and th e risks arisin g from them.
Wh ere the hazards cannot be removed and /or th e risks cannot be sufficiently red uced by
inh eren tl y safe d esign measures, protective measures (for example safeguard ing) sh al l be
provided to red uce the risk. Ad d itional means (for exampl e, awareness means) sh al l be
provided where fu rther risk reduction is n ecessary. I n ad d ition , workin g proced ures that
reduce risk can be necessary.
I t is recommended that, wh ere the user is known , Ann ex B be used to facilitate an exchan ge
of in formation between the user and the supplier(s) on basic cond itions and add itional user
specifications rel ated to th e electrical equ ipment.
N OTE
Th ose ad d i ti on al speci fi cati on s can :
–
provi d e ad d i tion al featu res th at are d epen d en t on th e type of m ach i n e (or g rou p of m ach i n es) an d th e
appl i cati on ;
–
faci l i tate m ai n ten an ce an d repai r; an d
–
i m prove th e rel iabi l i ty an d ease of operati on .
4.2
Selection of equipment
4.2.1
General
Electrical componen ts an d d evices sh al l :
–
–
–
be su itable for their intend ed use; and
con form to relevan t I EC stand ards where such exist; an d
be appl ied in accordance with the suppl ier’s instructions.
4.2.2
Switchgear
I n ad d ition to the requ iremen ts of I EC 60204-1 , d epend ing upon the mach in e, its in tend ed use
and its electrical equipmen t, th e d esigner may sel ect parts of the electrical eq uipment of the
machin e that are in compliance with relevant parts of th e I EC 61 439 series (see also
An nex F).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 28 –
4.3
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Electrical supply
4.3.1
General
The electrical eq uipment shall be d esigned to operate correctl y with th e cond itions of th e
supply:
–
–
–
as specified in 4. 3. 2 or 4. 3. 3, or
as otherwise specified by th e user, or
as specified by the su pplier of a special source of su ppl y (see 4. 3. 4)
4.3.2
AC supplies
Vol tage
Freq uency
H armonics
Vol tage unbalance
Vol tage in terruption
Vol tage d ips
4.3.3
Stead y state vol tage: 0, 9 to 1 , 1 of nominal voltage.
0, 99 to 1 , 01 of nominal frequency continu ousl y;
0, 98 to 1 , 02 sh ort time.
H armonic distortion not exceed in g 1 2 % of the total r. m. s. voltage
between l ive con d uctors for the sum of the 2nd through to the 30th
harmonic.
N eith er th e voltage of the negative sequence compon en t nor the
vol tage of th e zero seq uence componen t in three-phase su pplies
exceed in g 2 % of th e positive seq uence componen t.
Su ppl y in terrupted or at zero vol tage for n ot more th an 3 ms at any
rand om time in the su ppl y cycle with more than 1 s between
successive interruptions.
Vol tage d ips n ot exceed in g 20 % of th e rms vol tage of th e suppl y for
more than on e cycl e with more than 1 s between successive d ips.
DC supplies
From batteries:
Voltage
Vol tage in terruption
0, 85 to 1 , 1 5 of nominal voltage;
0, 7 to 1 , 2 of n omin al vol tage in the case of battery-operated
vehicles.
N ot exceed in g 5 ms.
From converting equ ipmen t:
Voltage
Vol tage in terruption
N OTE
Th i s i s a vari ati on to I EC G u i d e 1 06 to en su re proper operati on of el ectron i c eq u i pm en t.
Ripple (peak-to-peak)
4.3.4
0, 9 to 1 , 1 of n omin al voltage.
N ot exceeding 20 ms with more th an 1 s between successive
interruptions.
N ot exceed in g 0, 1 5 of nominal voltage.
Special supply systems
For special su ppl y systems (e. g. on-board generators, DC bus, etc. ) th e l imits given in 4. 3. 2
and 4. 3. 3 may be exceed ed provid ed th at the eq uipmen t is d esigned to operate correctl y with
th ose cond itions.
4.4
4.4.1
Physical environment and operating conditions
General
The electrical equ ipment shall be suitable for the ph ysical en vironmen t and operating
cond itions of its in tend ed use. Th e requ iremen ts of 4. 4. 2 to 4. 4. 8 cover the ph ysical
environ men t and operating con ditions of the majority of machines covered by th is part of
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 29 –
I EC 60204. Wh en special cond itions appl y or th e l imits specified are exceed ed , an exchan ge
of in formation between user an d supplier (see 4. 1 ) can be n ecessary.
4.4.2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
The el ectrical equ ipment shall not generate electromagnetic d isturbances above levels that
are appropriate for its intended operatin g en viron men t. I n ad d ition , the electrical equ ipmen t
sh al l h ave a su fficien t level of immun ity to electromagnetic disturbances so that it can function
in its inten d ed en vironmen t.
I mmu nity and /or emission tests are requ ired on the electrical equipmen t u nl ess the fol lowing
cond itions are ful filled :
•
the incorporated d evices an d components compl y with th e EM C requ iremen ts for th e
in tend ed EMC en vironmen t specified in the relevan t prod uct stand ard (or generic stand ard
wh ere no prod uct standard exists), and ;
•
th e electrical instal lation and wiring are consisten t with the instructions provided by the
su pplier of th e d evices and componen ts with regard to mu tu al in fluences, (cabling ,
screen in g, earth ing etc. ) or with in formative An nex H if such instructions are n ot available
from the suppl ier.
N OTE Th e g en eri c EM C stan d ard s I EC 61 000-6-1 or I EC 61 000-6-2 an d I EC 61 000-6-3 or I EC 61 000-6-4 g i ve
g en eral EM C em i ssi on an d i mm u n i ty l i mi ts.
4.4.3
Ambient air temperature
Electrical eq uipmen t shal l be capabl e of operating correctl y in the intend ed ambien t air
temperatu re. The minimu m requ irement for al l el ectrical equipment is correct operation in
ambien t air temperatu res ou tsid e of enclosures (cabinet or box) between + 5 °C an d + 40 °C.
4.4.4
Humidity
The electrical equ ipment sh all be capable of operatin g correctl y wh en th e relative h umid ity
d oes not exceed 50 % at a maximum temperature of + 40 °C. H igher relative humid ities are
permitted at l ower temperatures (for example 90 % at 20 °C).
H armful effects of occasion al cond ensation sh all be avoid ed by d esign of th e equipment or,
where necessary, by add ition al measu res (for example buil t-in heaters, air con d itioners, d rain
hol es).
4.4.5


Altitude
El ectrical equ ipmen t shall be capable of operatin g correctl y at al titu des up to 1 000 m above
mean sea level.

For equipment to be used at higher altitudes, it is necessary to take into account changes in parameters for example, the reduction of:
–
–
–
th e d ielectric strength, an d ;
th e switching capabil ity of the d evices, and ;
th e cool ing effect of the air .
Other parameters of different components can also alter with altitude.

I t is recommen d ed that the man u facturer is consul ted regard ing the correction factors to be
used wh ere th e factors are not specified in product d ata.
4.4.6
Contaminants
El ectrical equ ipmen t shal l be ad equately protected against th e ingress of solids and l iqu id s
(see 1 1 . 3).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 30 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
The electrical equ ipment sh all be ad equ ately protected against contaminan ts (for exampl e
d ust, acid s, corrosive gases, sal ts) that can be presen t in th e physical environ men t in which
th e electrical eq uipmen t is to be instal led .
4.4.7
Ionizing and non-ionizing radiation
Wh en equ ipment is subject to rad iation (for example microwave, ul traviolet, lasers, X-rays),
add itional measures shall be taken to avoid malfunction ing of the equ ipment and accelerated
d eterioration of the insu lation .
4.4.8
Vibration, shock, and bump
U n desirable effects of vibration , sh ock and bump (includ ing th ose generated by the machin e
and its associated equipment and th ose created by th e physical environment) sh all be
avoided by th e sel ection of suitable equ ipmen t, by moun tin g it away from th e machin e, or by
provision of an ti-vibration moun tings.
4.5
Transportation and storage
El ectrical equ ipmen t sh all be d esigned to withstand , or su itable precautions shall be taken to
protect against, th e effects of transportation an d storage temperatu res within a range of
–25 °C to + 55 °C an d for short period s not exceed ing 24 h at u p to + 70 °C. Suitabl e means
sh all be provided to prevent d amage from humid ity, vibration , and shock.
N OTE
4.6
El ectri cal eq u i pm en t su scepti bl e to d am ag e at l ow tem peratu res i n cl u d es PVC i n su l ated cabl es.
Provisions for handling
H eavy and bulky electrical equipmen t that has to be removed from th e mach ine for transport,
or that is ind ependen t of the machine, shall be provid ed with su itable means for hand l ing,
includ in g where n ecessary means for h and l ing by cranes or similar equ ipmen t.
5
5.1
Incoming supply conductor terminations and devices for disconnecting and
switching off
Incoming supply conductor terminations
I t is recommend ed that, where practicabl e, the electrical equ ipmen t of a mach ine is connected
to a single incoming suppl y. Where anoth er suppl y is n ecessary for certain parts of the
equipmen t (for example, electron ic eq uipmen t that operates at a different vol tage), that suppl y
sh ou ld be d erived , as far as is practicabl e, from d evices (for example, transformers,
converters) forming part of the electrical equ ipmen t of the machine. For large complex
mach in ery there can be a need for more than one incoming su pply depend ing upon th e site
su pply arrangemen ts (see 5. 3. 1 ).
U nless a plug is provid ed with the machine for the connection to th e supply (see 5. 3. 2 e)), it is
recommended that the supply con ductors are terminated at th e supply d isconnectin g d evice.
Where a neu tral cond uctor is used it shall be clearl y ind icated in the techn ical d ocumen tation
of th e machin e, such as in the instal lation d iagram and in th e circuit d iagram, an d a separate
insu lated terminal, labell ed N in accordance with 1 6. 1 , sh all be provid ed for the neu tral
conductor. Th e neu tral terminal may be provid ed as part of the suppl y d isconnectin g d evice.
There shall be no conn ection between th e n eu tral con ductor an d the protective bond ing circu it
inside the electrical equ ipment.
Exception : a conn ection may be made between th e n eu tral terminal and th e PE termin al at the
poin t of th e connection of the electrical equ ipmen t to a TN -C supply system.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 31 –
For machines su pplied from paral lel sources, the requ iremen ts of I EC 60364-1 for mul tipl e
source systems appl y.
Terminals for the incoming supply con nection shal l be clearl y id en tified in accord ance with
I EC 60445. The termin al for the extern al protective conductor sh al l be id en tified in
accord ance with 5. 2.
5.2
Terminal for connection of the external protective conductor
For each incoming suppl y, a termin al shal l be provid ed in th e same compartment as th e
associated line cond uctor terminals for con nection of the machine to the external protective
conductor.
The terminal sh al l be of such a size as to enable the conn ection of an external protective
copper cond uctor with a cross-sectional area d etermin ed in rel ation to the size of th e
associated l in e cond uctors in accordance with Tabl e 1 .
Table 1 – Minimum cross-sectional area of copper protective conductors
Cross-secti onal area of line
conductors S
mm2
M inimum cross-sectional area of the
correspondi ng protecti ve condu ctor
(PE) Sp
mm2
S ≤ 16
S
1 6 < S ≤ 35
16
S > 35
S/2
Wh ere an external protective con d uctor of a material oth er th an copper is used , the terminal
size and type shall be sel ected accord in gl y.
At each incoming supply poin t, the terminal for connection of extern al protective cond uctor
sh al l be marked or labelled with the letters PE (see I EC 60445).
5.3
Supply disconnecting (isolating) device
5.3.1
General
A supply d isconnectin g d evice shal l be provid ed :
–
for each incoming supply to (a) machin e(s);
N OTE Th e i n com i n g su ppl y can be con n ected d i rectl y to th e su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g d evi ce of th e mach i n e or to
th e su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g d evi ce of a feed er system of th e m ach i n e. Feed er system s of m ach i n es can i n cl u d e
con d u ctor wi res, con d u ctor bars, sl i p-ri n g assem bl i es, fl exi bl e cabl e system s (reel ed , festoon ed ) or i n d u cti ve
power su ppl y system s.
–
for each on-board power su ppl y.
The supply d isconnecting d evice shal l d isconn ect (isol ate) th e electrical equ ipmen t of the
mach in e from the su pply wh en required (for example for work on the machine, includ ing the
electrical equipmen t).
Wh ere two or more suppl y d iscon necting d evices are provided , protective in terl ocks for th eir
correct operation sh all also be provid ed in ord er to prevent a hazard ous situation, includ in g
d amage to th e mach ine or to the work in progress.
5.3.2
Type
The su ppl y d isconnecting device sh al l be one of the foll owing types:
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 32 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
a) switch-d iscon nector, with or without fuses, in accord ance with I EC 60947-3, u tilization
category AC-23B or DC-23B;
b) con trol an d protective switch ing d evice suitable for isolation , in accord ance with
I EC 60947-6-2;
c) a circuit-breaker su itable for isolation in accordance with I EC 60947-2;
d ) an y oth er switching device in accord ance with an I EC product stand ard for that d evice an d
wh ich meets th e isol ation req u iremen ts an d the appropriate u tilization category and /or
specified end urance requ iremen ts defin ed in th e prod uct stan d ard ;
e) a pl ug/socket combination for a flexibl e cable suppl y.
5.3.3
Requirements
Wh ere th e su pply d isconn ecting d evice is one of th e types specified in 5. 3. 2 a) to d) it shal l
fu lfil all of the followin g requ iremen ts:
–
–
–
–
–
–
isolate the electrical equipmen t from the su pply and have one OFF (isolated ) and one
ON posi ti on m arked wi th "O" an d "I " (sym bol s I EC 6041 7-5008 (2002-1 0) an d
I EC 6041 7-5007 (2002-1 0), see 1 0. 2. 2);
h ave a visible con tact gap or a position ind icator wh ich cannot in d icate OFF (isol ated ) u n til
all con tacts are actually open an d th e requiremen ts for the isolatin g function h ave been
satisfied ;
h ave an operating means (see 5. 3. 4);
be provid ed with a means permitting it to be locked in the OFF (isolated ) position (for
example by pad l ocks). When so l ocked , remote as well as local cl osing sh all be
preven ted ;
d isconnect all l ive cond uctors of its power suppl y circuit. H owever, for TN suppl y systems,
the neu tral con d uctor may or may n ot be d isconnected except in cou n tries where
d isconnection of the neu tral cond uctor (when used ) is compulsory;
h ave a breakin g capacity su fficien t to in terrupt the curren t of th e largest motor wh en
stal led togeth er with the sum of the normal ru nn in g cu rren ts of all oth er motors and other
l oad s. The calculated breaking capacity may be red uced by th e use of a proven d iversity
factor. Where motor(s) are suppl ied by con verter(s) or similar d evices, the calcul ation
sh ou ld take in to accoun t the possible effect on the requ ired breaking capacity.
Where the su ppl y d isconn ecting d evice is a plug/socket combination , it shal l compl y with the
requ iremen ts of 1 3. 4. 5 an d shal l have th e breaking capacity, or be in terlocked with a
switch ing d evice that has a breaking capacity, su fficien t to in terru pt the cu rren t of the largest
motor wh en stall ed together with the su m of the n ormal running curren ts of al l oth er motors
and other load s. Th e cal culated breakin g capacity may be red uced by th e use of a proven
d iversity factor. Wh ere th e in terl ocked switchin g d evice is electrical ly operated (for example a
con tactor) it shall h ave an appropriate utilisation category. Wh ere motor(s) are supplied by
con verter(s) or similar devices, th e calculation sh ou ld take in to accoun t th e possible effect on
th e required breakin g capacity.
N OTE A su i tabl y rated pl u g an d socket-ou tl et, cabl e cou pl er, or appl i an ce cou pl er, i n accord an ce wi th
I EC 60309-1 can fu l fi l th ese req u i remen ts.
Wh ere the su pply d isconnecting device is a plug/socket combination , a switching device with
an appropriate u tilisation category sh al l be provid ed for switching th e mach ine on and off.
This can be achieved by th e use of the in terlocked switch in g d evice d escribed above.
5.3.4
Operating means of the supply disconnecting device
The operating means (for example, a hand le) of th e supply d isconnecting device sh al l be
external to the enclosure of the electrical equipmen t.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 33 –
Exception : power-operated switchgear need not be provid ed with a h and le outsid e the
encl osure wh ere other means (e. g. push bu ttons) are provid ed to open the supply
d isconnecting device from ou tsid e the enclosu re.
The operating means of the suppl y d isconnecting device shall be easily accessible and
located between 0, 6 m and 1 , 9 m above th e servicin g level . An u pper l imit of 1 , 7 m is
recommended .
N OTE
Th e d i recti on of operati on i s g i ven i n I E C 61 31 0-3.
Wh ere th e external operating means is intend ed for emergency operation , see 1 0. 7. 3 or
1 0. 8. 3.
Wh ere th e external operatin g means is not in tend ed for emergency operations:
–
–
it is recommend ed that it be colou red BLACK or GREY (see 1 0. 2)
a suppl emen tary cover or door that can be read ily open ed with ou t the use of a key or tool
may be provid ed , for example for protection against en viron men tal cond itions or
mech an ical d amage. Such a cover/d oor sh all clearl y show that it provid es access to th e
operating means. Th is can be ach ieved , for example, by use of th e rel evan t symbol
I EC 6041 7-61 69-1 (201 2-08) (Figure 2) or I EC 6041 7-61 69-2 (201 2-08), (Figure 3).
Figu re 2 – Disconnector isolator
Figu re 3 – Disconnecting circuit breaker
5.3.5
Excepted circuits
The fol lowing circuits n eed not be d isconnected by the supply d isconnecting d evice:
–
–
–
–
l igh ting circuits for lighting need ed d urin g main tenance or repair;
socket ou tlets for the exclusive connection of repair or maintenance tools and equ ipmen t
(for example h and d rills, test equ ipment) (see 1 5. 1 );
u nd ervol tage protection circu its th at are only provid ed for au tomatic tripping i n the event
of suppl y failu re;
circu its supplying equ ipmen t th at shou ld n ormall y remain en ergized for correct operation
(for example temperatu re con trolled measurin g d evices, heaters, program storage
d evices).
I t is recommen ded , however, th at such circu its be provid ed with their own d isconnectin g
d evice.
Control circu its suppl ied via another suppl y d isconnectin g d evice, regardl ess of whether that
d isconnecting d evice is l ocated in the electrical equ ipment or in another mach in e or other
electrical equ ipment, need not be discon nected by the suppl y d isconnectin g device of the
electrical equ ipmen t.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 34 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Wh ere excepted circu its are n ot d isconnected by th e suppl y d isconnecting device:
–
–
permanen t warn ing label(s) shal l be appropriatel y placed in proximity to the operatin g
means of the suppl y d isconnectin g d evice to d raw atten tion to the h azard ;
a correspond ing statemen t shall be includ ed in th e main ten ance manu al, and one or more
of the fol lowing shall apply:
•
th e con d uctors are id en tified by colour takin g in to account the recommendation of
1 3. 2. 4;
•
excepted circu its are separated from other circu its;
•
excepted circuits are id en tified by perman ent warn in g label(s).
5.4
Devi ces for removal of power for preventi on of u nexpected start-u p
Devices for removal of power for th e preven tion of u nexpected start-u p shall be provid ed
wh ere a start-up of the machine or part of the machine can create a h azard (for example
d uring main tenance). Such d evices sh al l be appropriate and con ven ien t for the in tend ed use,
be suitabl y placed , an d read ily id en tifiable as to their fu nction and pu rpose. Where their
fu nction and purpose is n ot otherwise obvious (e. g. by their location) these d evices sh all be
marked to ind icate the exten t of removal of power.
N OTE 1 Th i s part of I EC 60204 d oes n ot ad d ress al l provi si on s for preven ti on of u n expected start u p. Fu rth er
i n form ati on i s provi d ed i n I SO 1 41 1 8.
N OTE 2 Removal of power m ean s rem oval of th e con n ecti on to th e sou rce of el ectri cal en erg y bu t d oes n ot i m pl y
i sol ati on .
The supply d isconnecting device or other d evices in accord ance with 5. 3. 2 may be used for
preven tion of u nexpected start-u p.
Discon nectors, withdrawable fuse links and withd rawable l inks may be used for protection of
u nexpected start-up on ly if they are l ocated in an enclosed electrical operating area (see
3. 1 . 23).
Devices that d o not fu lfil the isolation function (for example a contactor switched off by a
control circuit, or Power Drive System (PDS) with a Safe Torq ue Off (STO) function in
accord ance with I EC 61 800-5-2) may on ly be used for preven tion of u nexpected start-up
d uring tasks such as:
–
–
–
inspections;
adj ustmen ts;
work on th e electrical equ ipmen t where:
•
th ere is n o hazard arising from el ectric shock (see Clause 6) and burn ;
•
th e switching off means remains effective throu gh ou t the work;
•
th e work is of a minor n ature (for exampl e, repl acemen t of plug-in devices withou t
d istu rbing existing wiring).
The selection of a d evice will be d epend ent on th e risk assessmen t, taking into accoun t the
in tended use of the d evice, and the persons who are in tend ed to operate them.
5.5
Devi ces for i solati n g electri cal equ i pm en t
Devices sh al l be provided for isolating (d isconnectin g) the electrical equ ipmen t or part(s) of
th e electrical equ ipment to enable work to be carried ou t when it is d e-energised an d isolated.
Such d evices sh all be:
–
–
appropriate and con ven ien t for th e intend ed use;
su itabl y placed ;
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
–
– 35 –
read ily id en tifiable as to wh ich part(s) or circuit(s) of the equipmen t is served . Where th eir
fu nction and pu rpose is not otherwise obvious (e. g. by their location) these d evices sh al l
be marked to ind icate the exten t of th e eq uipmen t that th ey isolate.
The supply d isconnecting d evice (see 5. 3) may, in some cases, fu l fil that fu nction. H owever,
wh ere it is necessary to work on ind ivid u al parts of th e el ectrical eq uipmen t of a mach in e, or
on on e of the mach in es fed by a common cond uctor bar, cond uctor wire or ind uctive power
su ppl y system, a d isconn ecting d evice sh all be provid ed for each part, or for each machin e,
requiring separate isol ation .
I n ad d ition to the supply d isconn ecting d evice, th e fol lowing d evices that fulfil the isolation
fu nction may be provided for th is pu rpose:
–
–
d evices d escribed in 5. 3. 2;
d isconnectors, withd rawabl e fuse links and withd rawable links only if located in an
encl osed electrical operatin g area (see 3. 1 . 23) and relevan t in formation is provided with
th e electrical equipment (see Clause 1 7).
5.6
Protection against unauthorized, inadvertent and/or mistaken connection
Wh ere th e d evices d escribed in 5. 4 and 5. 5 are located ou tsid e an enclosed electrical
operating area they shal l be equ ipped with means to secure them in the OFF position
(d isconn ected state), (for exampl e by provisions for pad locking, trapped key in terlockin g).
Wh en so secu red , remote as well as l ocal recon nection shal l be preven ted .
Wh ere the d evices d escribed in 5. 4 and 5. 5 are located insid e an encl osed electrical
operating area other means of protection against reconnection (for example warn ing l abels)
can be su fficien t.
H owever, wh en a plug/socket combin ation accord ing to 5. 3. 2 e) is so positioned that it can be
kept un d er th e immed iate supervision of the person carryin g ou t the work, means for securing
in th e d isconnected state n eed not be provid ed .
6
Protection against electric shock
6.1
General
The electrical equ ipment sh al l provid e protection of persons against electric shock by:
–
–
basic protection (see 6. 2 and 6. 4), and ;
faul t protection (see 6. 3 and 6. 4).
The measures for protection given in 6. 2, 6. 3, and , for PELV, in 6. 4, are a selection from
I EC 60364-4-41 . Wh ere th ose measures are not practicable, for example d ue to the ph ysical
or operational cond itions, other measu res from I EC 60364-4-41 may be used (e. g. SELV).
6.2
6.2.1
Basic protection
General
For each circu it or part of the electrical equ ipment, the measu res of eith er 6. 2. 2 or 6. 2. 3 an d ,
wh ere applicabl e, 6. 2. 4 sh al l be applied .
Exception : where th ose measures are not appropriate, other measures for basic protection
(for example by usin g barriers, by placing ou t of reach , usin g obstacles, using construction or
instal lation techn iqu es th at preven t access) as d efined in I EC 60364-4-41 may be applied
(see also 6. 2. 5 an d 6. 2. 6).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 36 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Wh ere the equ ipment is located in pl aces open to all persons, wh ich can includ e ch il dren ,
measures of eith er 6. 2. 2 with a minimum d egree of protection against con tact with live parts
correspond ing to I P4X or I PXXD (see I EC 60529), or 6. 2. 3 sh al l be applied .
6.2.2
Protection by enclosures
Live parts sh al l be located insid e enclosu res that provide protection against con tact with live
parts of at least I P2X or I PXXB (see I EC 60529).
Wh ere the top surfaces of the enclosure are read ily accessible, the min imum degree of
protection against con tact with live parts provid ed by the top su rfaces shall be I P4X or I PXXD.
Open in g an enclosure (i. e. open in g doors, l id s, covers, and th e l ike) shal l be possible only
und er one of th e following cond itions:
a) The use of a key or tool is n ecessary for access.
N OTE 1
Th e u se of a key or tool i s i n ten d ed to restri ct access to ski l l ed or i n stru cted person s (see 1 7. 2 f)).
Al l l ive parts, (inclu ding those on the insid e of d oors) that are likel y to be touched wh en
resetting or ad justing d evices in tend ed for such operations while the equipmen t is still
connected , sh al l be protected against contact to at least I P2X or I PXXB. Oth er live parts
on th e inside of doors shal l be protected against unin tention al d irect con tact to at least
I P1 X or I PXXA.
b) The d isconnection of live parts insid e th e enclosure before the enclosu re can be opened .
Th is may be accomplished by in terlockin g th e d oor with a d iscon necting device (for
exampl e, the suppl y d isconnectin g d evice) so th at the d oor can on l y be opened when th e
d isconnecting device is open an d so that th e d iscon necting d evice can only be closed
wh en th e d oor is closed .
Exception : a key or tool as prescribed by the su ppl ier can be used to d efeat the in terlock
provid ed that the foll owing cond itions are met:
– it is possible at all times wh ile the interlock is defeated to open th e d isconnecting
d evice an d lock th e d isconnectin g d evice in th e OFF (isolated) position or otherwise
preven t un au thorised closure of the d isconnecting device;
– u pon closin g th e door, the in terlock is au tomatically restored ;
– al l l ive parts, (incl ud ing th ose on the insid e of d oors) th at are l ikel y to be touched wh en
resetting or adj usting d evices in tend ed for such operations wh ile th e equ ipment is still
connected , are protected against unin ten tional con tact with live parts to at least I P2X
or I PXXB and other l ive parts on the insid e of d oors are protected against uninten tion al
con tact to at l east I P1 X or I PXXA;
– rel evan t information abou t th e proced ures for the d efeat of th e in terl ock is provid ed
with th e instructions for use of the electrical equipmen t (see Clause 1 7).
– means are provid ed to restrict access to live parts beh in d d oors th at are not d irectly
in terlocked with the d isconnecting means to skil led or instructed persons. (See
1 7. 2 b)).
All parts that are still live after switchin g off the d isconnecting d evice(s) (see 5. 3. 5) sh al l
be protected against direct con tact to at least I P2X or I PXXB (see I EC 60529). Such parts
sh al l be marked with a warning sign in accord ance with 1 6. 2. 1 (see also 1 3. 2. 4 for
iden tification of cond uctors by col our), except for:
–
parts that can be live onl y because of con nection to in terlocking circu its an d that are
d istinguished by colou r as poten tial ly live in accord ance with 1 3. 2. 4;
– th e supply terminals of th e suppl y d isconnecting d evice when the l atter is mou nted
alone in a separate enclosure.
c) Open in g with ou t the use of a key or a tool and withou t discon nection of live parts shall be
possible only when all l ive parts are protected against contact to at least I P2X or I PXXB
(see I EC 60529). Wh ere barriers provide th is protection , either they shal l require a tool for
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 37 –
their removal or all live parts protected by them sh al l be au tomaticall y d isconnected when
the barrier is removed . Where protection against contact is achieved in accord ance with
6. 2. 2 c), and a h azard can be caused by man ual actuation of d evices (for exampl e man ual
closing of contactors or relays), such actu ation shou ld be preven ted by barriers or
obstacles that req uire a tool for their removal .
6.2.3
Protection by insu lation of live parts
Live parts protected by insul ation shal l be completely covered with insu lation that can onl y be
removed by d estruction. Such insu lation shal l be capable of withstand ing the mechan ical,
ch emical, electrical , and thermal stresses to which it can be subj ected und er normal operatin g
cond itions.
N OTE Pai n ts, varn ish es, l acq u ers, an d si m i l ar prod u cts al on e are g en eral l y con si d ered to be i n ad eq u ate for
protecti on agai n st el ectri c sh ock u n d er n orm al operati n g con d i ti on s.
6.2.4
Protection against residual voltages
Live parts havin g a resid ual vol tage greater than 60 V when the supply is disconn ected shall
be d ischarged to 60 V or less with in a time period of 5 s provid ed that th is rate of d ischarge
d oes not in terfere with the proper function ing of the equipmen t. Exempted from this
requ iremen t are componen ts having a stored ch arge of 60 µ C or less. Wh ere th is specified
rate of d isch arge would interfere with the proper functionin g of the eq uipmen t, a d urabl e
warning notice drawing atten tion to th e hazard and stating th e delay requ ired before the
enclosure may be opened shal l be d isplayed at an easily visible location on or immediately
ad j acent to th e enclosure that con tains the live parts.
I n the case of plugs or similar devices, the with d rawal of wh ich resul ts in the exposure of
conductors (for example pins), th e d ischarge time to 60 V sh all not exceed 1 s, otherwise
such cond uctors shall be protected to at least I P2X or I PXXB. I f n either a discharge time of
1 s n or a protection of at least I P2X or I PXXB can be achieved (for example in the case of
removable collectors on cond uctor wires, cond uctor bars, or sl ip-ring assemblies, see 1 2. 7. 4),
ad d itional switching devices or an appropriate warning, for example a warn ing sign d rawing
atten tion to th e hazard and stating the delay required shall be provided . Wh en th e eq uipmen t
is located in places open to all persons, wh ich can includ e ch ild ren, warn ings are not
su fficien t and th erefore a minimu m d egree of protection against contact with live parts to I P4X
or I PXXD is requ ired .
N OTE
6.2.5
Freq u en cy con verters an d DC bu s su ppl i es cou l d h ave typi cal l y a l on g er d i sch arg e ti m e th an 5 s.
Protection by barriers
For protection by barriers, th e req uirements of I EC 60364-4-41 shall appl y.
6.2.6
Protection by placing out of reach or protection by obstacles
For protection by pl acing ou t of reach , the requiremen ts of I EC 60364-4-41 sh al l apply. For
protection by obstacles, th e requ iremen ts of I EC 60364-4-41 sh all appl y.
For con ductor wire systems or cond uctor bar systems with a d egree of protection l ess than
I P2X or I PXXB, see 1 2. 7. 1 .
6.3
6.3.1
Fault protection
General
Faul t protection (3. 31 ) is in tend ed to prevent hazard ous situ ations due to an insulation fau l t
between live parts an d exposed cond uctive parts.
For each circu it or part of th e electrical equipmen t, at l east on e of th e measu res in
accord ance with 6. 3. 2 to 6. 3. 3 sh al l be applied :
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 38 –
–
–
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
measures to preven t the occurrence of a touch voltage (6. 3. 2); or
au tomatic d isconnection of the suppl y before the time of contact with a touch vol tage can
become h azard ous (6. 3. 3).

N OTE 1
The risk of harmful physiological effects from touch voltages depends upon a number of factors. These
include but are not limited to; value of touch voltage, duration of possible exposure, environmental factors, skin condition
N OTE 2 I E C 61 1 40 provi d es i n form ati on abou t cl asses of eq u i pm en t an d protecti ve provi si on s.
6. 3. 2
6. 3. 2. 1
P re ve n t i o n o f t h e o c c u rre n c e o f a t o u c h
vo l t a g e
G e n e ra l
M easures to prevent the occurrence of a touch vol tage include the followin g:
–
–
provision of class I I equ ipmen t or by equivalen t insu lation ;
electrical separation .
6. 3. 2. 2
P ro t e c t i o n b y p ro v i s i o n
o f c l a s s I I e q u i p m e n t o r b y e q u i va l e n t i n s u l a t i o n
Th is measure is intend ed to prevent the occu rrence of touch vol tages on the accessible parts
through a fau l t in th e basic insu lation .
Th is protection is provid ed by one or more of the following:
–
–
–
class I I electrical devices or apparatus (dou ble insu lation , rein forced insu lation or by
equ ivalen t insu lation in accordance with I EC 61 1 40);
switchgear and control gear assemblies havin g total insul ation in accord ance
with I EC 61 439-1 ;
su pplemen tary or reinforced insulation in accord ance with I EC 60364-4-41 .
6. 3. 2. 3
P ro t e c t i o n b y e l e c t ri c a l s e p a ra t i o n
El ectrical separation of an ind ivid ual circu it is intend ed to prevent a touch vol tage through
con tact with exposed con d uctive parts th at can be energized by a fau l t in th e basic insu lation
of the live parts of that circu it.
For this type of protection , the requiremen ts of I EC 60364-4-41 appl y.
6. 3. 3
P ro t e c t i o n b y a u t o m a t i c d i s c o n n e c t i o n
of su ppl y
Automatic d isconnection of the su pply of an y circu it affected by an insu lation fau lt is intend ed
to preven t a h azard ous situation resulting from a touch vol tage.
Th is measure consists of the in terruption of on e or more of th e line cond uctors by th e
au tomatic operation of a protective d evice in case of a fau lt. This in terruption shall occur
with in a su fficien tl y short time to l imit th e d uration of a touch voltage to a time with in the l imits
specified in An nex A for TN and TT systems.
Th is measure necessitates co-ord ination between :
–
–
–
the type of supply system, the supply source imped ance and the earthing system;
the imped ance values of th e d ifferen t el emen ts of th e line and of the associated faul t
cu rren t paths throu gh the protective bond ing circu it;
the characteristics of the protective d evices that d etect insu lation fau lt(s).
N OTE 1
1 8. 2 .
Detai l s of veri fi cati on of con d i ti on s for protecti on by au tom ati c d i scon n ection of su ppl y are provi d ed i n
Th is protective measure comprises both:

BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
–
–
– 39 –
protective bond ing of exposed cond uctive parts (see 8. 2. 3),
and one of th e following:
a) I n TN systems, the fol lowing protective d evices may be used :
•
overcurren t protective d evices;
•
resid ual curren t protective d evices (RCDs) and associated overcurren t protective
d evice(s).
N OTE 2 Th e preven ti ve m ai n ten an ce can be en h an ced by u se of a resi d u al cu rren t mon i tori n g d evi ce,
RCM , com pl yi n g wi th I EC 62020.
b) in TT systems, either:
•
RCDs and associated overcurren t protective d evice(s) to in itiate the automatic
d isconnection of the su ppl y on d etection of an insul ation fau lt from a live part to
exposed cond uctive parts or to earth, or
•
overcurren t protective devices may be used for fault protection provid ed a su itabl y
low value of the fau l t loop imped ance Zs (see A. 2. 2. 3) is permanen tl y and reliabl y
assured ;
N OTE 3 Th e preven ti ve m ai n ten an ce can be en h an ced by u se of a resi d u al cu rren t mon i tori n g d evi ce,
RCM , com pl yi n g wi th I EC 62020.
c) I n I T systems the relevan t requ iremen ts of I EC 60364-4-41 sh all be fulfilled . During an
insu lation fau l t, an acoustic and optical signal sh al l be sustain ed . After annunciation ,
th e acoustic sign al may th en be manuall y mu ted . This can req uire an agreement
between the supplier and user regard in g th e provision of insu lation mon itoring d evices
and /or insu lation fau lt location system(s).
N OTE 4 I n l arg e m ach i n es, th e provi si on of an i n su l ati on fau l t l ocati on system (I FLS) i n accord an ce with
I EC 61 557-9 can faci l i tate m ai n ten an ce.
Wh ere automatic d iscon nection is provid ed in accord ance with a), an d d iscon nection within
th e time specified in A. 1 . 1 can not be assu red , su pplemen tary protective bon d ing sh all be
provid ed as n ecessary to meet the requiremen ts of A. 1 . 3.
Wh ere a power drive system (PDS) is provided, faul t protection shal l be provid ed for those
circu its of the power d rive system that are supplied by the converter. Where th is protection is
n ot provid ed with in the con verter, the necessary protection measures sh al l be in accord ance
with th e converter man ufacturer’s instructions.
6.4
Protection by the use of PELV
6.4.1
General requirements
The use of PELV (Protective Extra-Low Voltage) is to protect persons against el ectric shock
from ind irect con tact and limited area d irect con tact (see 8. 2. 1 ).
PELV circu its sh all satisfy all of th e fol lowin g cond itions:
a) the nominal voltage sh al l n ot exceed :
•
25 V AC r. m. s. or 60 V ripple-free DC when th e equipmen t is normally used in dry
locations and when large area contact of live parts with the human bod y is n ot
expected ; or
•
6 V AC r. m. s. or 1 5 V rippl e-free DC in al l other cases;
N OTE "Ri ppl e-free" i s con ven ti on al l y d efi n ed for a si n u soi d al ri ppl e vol tag e as a ri ppl e con ten t of n ot m ore
th an 1 0 % r. m. s.
b) one sid e of the circu it or one point of the source of th e su ppl y of that circuit sh al l be
connected to the protective bond in g circuit;
c) live parts of PELV circu its shal l be electrical ly separated from oth er live circu its. Electrical
separation sh all be not less than th at required between the primary an d second ary circuits
of a safety isolating transformer (see I EC 61 558-1 and I EC 61 558-2-6 );
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 40 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
d ) cond uctors of each PELV circuit sh al l be ph ysical ly separated from th ose of an y
other circu it. When th is requ irement is impracticable, the insulation provisions of 1 3. 1 . 3
sh al l apply;
e) plu gs an d socket-ou tl ets for a PELV circuit shall con form to th e following:
•
plu gs shal l not be able to en ter socket-ou tl ets of oth er vol tage systems;
•
socket-outl ets sh al l not admit plu gs of other vol tage systems.
6.4.2
Sources for PELV
The source for PELV shal l be one of th e foll owing:
–
–
–
–
7
a safety isolatin g transformer in accord ance with I EC 61 558-1 and I EC 61 558-2-6;
a source of cu rren t provid ing a d egree of safety eq uivalen t to th at of the safety isolating
transformer (for example a motor generator with wind in g provid ing equ ivalen t isol ation);
an electrochemical source (for example a battery) or an oth er source in depend en t of a
higher vol tage circuit (for exampl e a d iesel -driven gen erator);
an electronic power supply con formin g to appropriate stan d ards specifying measures to be
taken to ensu re th at, even in th e case of an in tern al fau l t, th e voltage at th e outgoing
terminals cannot exceed th e values specified in 6. 4. 1 .
Protection of equipment
7.1
General
Th is Clause 7 details the measures to be taken to protect equipmen t against th e effects of:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
overcurrent arisin g from a short-circuit;
overload and /or loss of cooling of motors;
abnormal temperature;
loss of or red uction in the suppl y vol tage;
overspeed of mach in es/machin e elemen ts;
earth fau lt/resid ual curren t;
incorrect phase sequence;
overvol tage d ue to l igh tning and switch in g surges.
7.2
7.2.1
Overcurrent protection
General
Overcurren t protection sh al l be provid ed where th e curren t in any circu it can exceed either th e
rating of any component or the curren t carrying capacity of th e cond uctors, wh ichever is the
l esser value. The ratings or settings to be selected are d etailed in 7. 2. 1 0.
7.2.2
Supply conductors
U n less oth erwise specified by the user, the supplier of th e electrical equ ipmen t is not
responsible for provid ing the supply cond uctors and the overcurren t protective d evice for the
su ppl y con ductors to th e electrical eq uipmen t.
The supplier of the electrical eq uipmen t shal l state in th e install ation d ocumen ts the d ata
n ecessary for cond uctor d imension in g (includ ing the maximum cross-sectional area of the
su ppl y conductor that can be conn ected to th e terminals of the el ectrical eq uipmen t) an d for
selectin g the overcurren t protective d evice (see 7. 2. 1 0 and 1 7).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
7.2.3
– 41 –
Power circuits
Devices for d etection and interruption of overcurren t, selected in accord ance with 7. 2. 1 0, shall
be appl ied to each l ive cond uctor incl ud in g circu its su pplying control circuit transformers.
The following con ductors, as applicabl e, sh al l not be d isconn ected withou t d isconnectin g all
associated l ive cond uctors:
–
–
–
th e neu tral cond uctor of AC power circuits;
the earthed cond uctor of DC power circu its;
DC power conductors bond ed to exposed cond uctive parts of mobile machines.
Where the cross-sectional area of the neutral con d uctor is at l east equ al to or equ ivalen t to
that of the l in e cond uctors, it is not n ecessary to provid e overcurrent detection for th e neu tral
cond uctor nor a d isconnectin g d evice for that con d uctor. For a neu tral con d uctor with a crosssectional area smaller th an that of the associated line conductors, th e measures d etailed in
524 of I EC 60364-5-52: 2009 sh al l apply.
I n I T systems, it is recommend ed th at the n eutral conductor is not used . H owever, where a
neu tral cond uctor is used , the measures d etailed in 431 . 2. 2 of I EC 60364-4-43: 2008 shall
apply.
7.2.4
Control circuits
Cond uctors of con trol circuits d irectly conn ected to th e suppl y vol tage sh all be protected
against overcurren t in accordance with 7. 2. 3.
Cond uctors of control circuits supplied by a transformer or DC su ppl y shal l be protected
against overcu rrent (see also 9. 4. 3. 1 . 1 ):
–
–
in con trol circu its con nected to the protective bond in g circuit, by inserting an overcurren t
protective d evice in to the switch ed conductor;
in con trol circu its n ot conn ected to the protective bond ing circu it;
•
wh ere all con trol circuits of the equipmen t h ave th e same curren t carrying capacity, by
inserting an overcurren t protective d evice in to the switch ed cond uctor, or;
wh ere d ifferen t con trol circuits of th e equipmen t have d ifferen t cu rren t carrying
capacity, by insertin g an overcurrent protective device in to both switched an d common
cond uctors of each con trol circu it.
Exception: Wh ere the su ppl y unit provid es curren t limiting below the curren t carrying capacity
of the cond uctors in a circu it and below the cu rrent rating of connected components, no
separate overcurrent protective d evice is requ ired .
•
7.2.5
Socket outlets and their associated conductors
Overcurren t protection sh al l be provided for the circuits feed ing th e general purpose socket
ou tl ets in ten ded primarily for suppl ying power to main tenance eq uipmen t. Overcurrent
protective d evices shal l be provid ed in the un earthed live cond uctors of each circuit feed in g
such socket ou tlets. See also 1 5. 1 .
7.2.6
Lighting circuits
Al l unearthed cond uctors of circu its su ppl ying ligh ting shal l be protected against the effects of
sh ort-circu its by th e provision of overcurren t d evices separate from those protectin g other
circu its.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 42 –
7.2.7
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Transformers
Transformers shall be protected by an overcurrent protective d evice having a type an d setting
in accordance with the transformer manu facturer’s instructions. Such protection shal l (see
also 7. 2. 1 0):
–
–
avoid nu isance tripping d u e to transformer magnetizing inrush cu rren ts;
avoid a wind in g temperature rise in excess of th e permitted valu e for the insu lation class
of transformer wh en it is su bj ected to th e effects of a short-circu it at its second ary
terminals.
7.2.8
Location of overcurrent protective devices
An overcurren t protective d evice shal l be l ocated at the poin t where a red uction in th e crosssectional area of the con d uctors or anoth er ch an ge red uces th e cu rren t-carrying capacity of
th e con d uctors, except wh ere all the fol lowin g cond itions are satisfied :
–
–
–
th e curren t carrying capacity of th e cond uctors is at least eq ual to that of th e load ;
th e part of th e cond uctor(s) between th e point of reduction of curren t-carrying capacity and
th e position of the overcurren t protective d evice is no longer th an 3 m;
th e cond uctors are instal led in such a mann er as to red uce th e possibil ity of a sh ortcircu it, for example, protected by an enclosure or d uct.
7.2.9
Overcurrent protective devices
The rated sh ort-circu it breakin g capacity shal l be at least equal to the prospective fau lt
cu rren t at the poin t of instal lation . Wh ere th e short-circu it cu rren t to an overcurren t protective
d evice can inclu d e ad d itional curren ts other than from the suppl y (for example from motors,
from power factor correction capacitors), those curren ts sh all be taken in to consideration.
N OTE I n formati on on co-ord i n ati on u n d er sh ort-ci rcu i t con d i ti on s between a ci rcu i t-breaker an d an oth er sh ortci rcu i t protecti ve d evi ce i s provi d ed i n An n ex A of I EC 60947-2: 2006, I EC 60947-2: 2006/AM D1 : 2009 an d
I EC 60947-2: 2006/AM D2 : 201 3.
Wh ere fuses are provid ed as overcu rren t protective d evices, a type read il y available in the
coun try of use shall be selected , or arrangements shal l be mad e for th e suppl y of spare parts.
7.2.1 0
Rating and setting of overcurrent protective devices
The rated cu rren t of fuses or the setting curren t of other overcurren t protective d evices shal l
be selected as low as possibl e bu t ad equate for the an ticipated overcurren ts (for example
d uring starting of motors or energizing of transformers). Wh en selecting those protective
d evices, consid eration shal l be given to the protection of switch ing d evices against d amage
d ue to overcu rren ts.
The rated cu rren t or setting of an overcurrent protective device for cond uctors is d etermined
by the curren t carryin g capacity of th e cond uctors to be protected in accord ance with 1 2. 4,
Clause D. 3 and the maximum al lowabl e in terruptin g time t in accordance with Clause D. 4,
takin g in to accoun t the n eeds of co-ord in ation with other electrical devices in th e protected
circu it.
7.3
7.3.1
Protection of motors against overheating
General
Protection of motors against overheating shal l be provid ed for each motor rated at more than
0, 5 kW.
Exception: I n applications where an automatic in terruption of the motor operation is
unacceptable (for example fire pu mps), the means of d etection sh al l give a warning sign al to
which the operator can respon d .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 43 –
Protection of motors against overheating can be ach ieved by:
–
overload protection (7. 3. 2),
N OTE 1 Overl oad protecti ve d evi ces d etect th e ti m e an d cu rren t rel ati on sh i ps ( I 2 t ) i n a ci rcu i t th at are i n
excess of th e rated fu l l l oad of th e ci rcu i t an d i n i ti ate appropri ate con trol respon ses.
–
over-temperature protection (7. 3. 3), or
N OTE 2 Tem peratu re d etecti on d evi ces sen se over-tem peratu re an d i n i ti ate appropri ate con trol respon ses.
–
cu rrent-l imitin g protection .
Au tomatic restarting of an y motor after th e operation of protection against overheating sh all
be preven ted wh ere this can cause a h azard ous situation or d amage to th e mach in e or to th e
work in progress.
7.3.2
Overload protection
Wh ere overload protection is provided , d etection of overload (s) sh all be provid ed in each l ive
cond uctor except for th e n eutral cond uctor.
H owever, wh ere the motor overl oad d etection is n ot used for cable overload protection (see
also Clause D. 2), d etection of overload may be omitted in one of the live cond uctors. For
motors having single-ph ase or DC power supplies, d etection in on l y one unearth ed live
cond uctor is permitted .
Wh ere overload protection is achieved by switchin g off, the switch ing d evice shall switch off
all live cond uctors. The switch in g of th e neutral cond uctor is n ot necessary for overload
protection .
Wh ere motors with special d uty ratings are required to start or to brake frequen tl y (for
example, motors for rapid traverse, lockin g, rapid reversal, sensitive dril ling) it can be d ifficu lt
to provid e overload protection with a time constan t comparable with that of the wind in g to be
protected . Appropriate protective d evices design ed to accommodate special d uty motors or
over-temperature protection (see 7. 3. 3) can be necessary.
For motors th at cannot be overloaded (for example torqu e motors, motion drives th at eith er
are protected by mechan ical overload protection d evices or are ad equately d imension ed),
overload protection is not requ ired .
7.3.3
Over-temperature protection
The provision of motors with over-temperature protection in accord ance with I EC 60034-1 1 is
recommended in situations where th e cool ing can be impaired (for example d usty
en viron men ts). Depend in g u pon the type of motor, protection u nder stal led rotor or l oss of
phase cond itions is not always ensured by over-temperature protection , and ad d itional
protection sh ou ld th en be provid ed .
Over-temperature protection is also recommend ed for motors th at cannot be overload ed (for
example torq ue motors, motion d rives that are either protected by mech an ical overload
protection devices or are ad equ ately d imensioned), wh ere the possibil ity of over-temperature
exists (for example due to red uced cool in g).
7.4
Protection against abnormal temperature
Eq uipmen t shal l be protected against abnormal temperatures that can resu l t in a hazard ous
situation .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 44 –
7.5
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Protection against the effects of supply interruption or voltage reduction and
subsequent restoration
Where a supply in terru ption or a voltage red uction can cause a hazard ous situ ation , d amage
to the mach in e, or to the work in progress, un dervoltage protection shal l be provided by, for
example, switch ing off the machine at a pred etermined vol tage level.
Where the operation of th e machine can all ow for an in terruption or a red uction of the vol tage
for a short time period , d elayed un d ervol tage protection may be provided . The operation of
the un dervoltage d evice sh all n ot impair th e operation of an y stopping control of the mach in e.
U pon restoration of th e vol tage or u pon switch ing on the incomin g su ppl y, au tomatic or
u nexpected restarting of the mach ine shall be preven ted where such a restart can cause a
h azard ous situation .
Where on ly a part of th e mach in e or of the group of mach in es workin g togeth er in a coord inated manner is affected by the vol tage red uction or supply in terruption , the und ervol tage
protection sh all initiate appropriate con trol comman d s to ensu re co-ord in ation .
7.6
Motor overspeed protection
Overspeed protection sh all be provided where overspeed ing can occur and cou ld possibl y
cause a hazard ous situ ation takin g in to accoun t measures in accord ance with 9. 3. 2.
Overspeed protection sh all initiate appropriate con trol responses an d sh all preven t au tomatic
restarting.
The overspeed protection shou ld operate in such a mann er th at the mech an ical speed l imit of
the motor or its load is not exceed ed .
N OTE
7.7
Th i s protecti on can con si st, for exampl e, of a cen tri fu g al swi tch or speed l i m i t m on i tor.
Additional earth fault/residual current protection
I n ad d ition to provid ing overcurren t protection for au tomatic d isconnection as d escribed in 6. 3,
earth fau l t/resid ual curren t protection can be provid ed to red uce d amage to eq uipmen t du e to
earth fau lt cu rren ts less th an th e detection l evel of the overcu rrent protection .
The settin g of th e d evices sh all be as low as possible consisten t with correct operation of the
equipmen t.
I f fault curren ts with DC components are possible, an RCD of type B in accordance with
I EC TR 60755 can be req uired .
7.8
Phase sequence protection
Where an incorrect ph ase sequence of the su pply voltage can cause a hazard ous situ ation or
d amage to th e mach ine, protection sh all be provid ed .
N OTE
7.9
Con d i ti on s of u se th at can l ead to an i n correct ph ase seq u en ce i n cl u d e:
-
a m ach i n e tran sferred from on e su ppl y to an oth er;
-
a m obi l e m ach i n e wi th a faci l i ty for con n ecti on to an extern al power su ppl y.
Protection against overvoltages due to lightning and to switching surges
Surge protective devices (SPDs) can be provid ed to protect against the effects of
overvoltages d ue to lightn ing or to switching surges.
Where provid ed :
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
–
–
– 45 –
SPDs for the su ppression of overvol tages d u e to l igh tn ing sh all be connected to th e
incoming terminals of the supply d isconnecting d evice.
SPDs for the su ppression of overvol tages d u e to switching surges shall be con nected as
n ecessary for eq uipment requiring such protection .
N OTE 1 I n form ati on abou t th e correct sel ecti on an d i n stal l ati on of SPDs i s gi ven for exam pl e i n I EC 60364-4-44,
I EC 60364-5-53, I EC 61 643-1 2, I EC 62 305-1 an d I EC 62305-4.
N OTE 2 Eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g of th e m ach i n e, i ts el ectri cal eq u i pmen t an d extran eou s-con d u cti ve-parts to a
com mon bon d i n g n etwork of th e bu i l d i n g /si te can h el p m i ti gate el ectrom ag n eti c i n terferen ce, i n cl u d i n g th e effects
of l i g h tn i n g , on th e eq u i pm en t.
7.1 0
Short-circuit current rating
The sh ort-circuit curren t ratin g of the el ectrical equ ipment sh al l be d etermined . Th is can be
d one by the application of d esign rul es or by calcul ation or by test.
N OTE Th e sh ort-ci rcu i t cu rren t rati n g m ay be d eterm i n ed , for exampl e, i n accord an ce wi th I EC 61 439-1 ,
I E C 60909-0, I EC/TR 60909-1 , or I EC/TR 61 91 2-1 .
8
8.1
Equipotential bonding
General
Th is Clause 8 provid es requ irements for protective bond ing and functional bond ing. Figure 4
il lustrates those concepts.
Protective bond ing is a basic provision for fault protection to enable protection of persons
against electric sh ock (see 6. 3. 3 and 8. 2).
The objective of functional bond in g (see 8. 4) is to red uce:
–
–
–
th e consequence of an insulation failure which cou ld affect the operation of the machin e;
electrical d isturbances to sensitive electrical equ ipmen t wh ich cou ld affect th e operation of
th e mach ine;
ind uced curren ts from ligh tning wh ich could d amage the el ectric eq uipment.
Functional bond ing is achieved by connection to th e protective bond in g circu it, bu t wh ere the
l evel of electrical d isturbances on the protective bon d ing circu it is not su fficien tl y l ow for
proper functioning of electrical eq uipmen t, it can be necessary to use separate con ductors for
protective an d functional bond ing.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 46 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
M ach i n e
El ectri cal eq u i pm en t
IEC
Protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcui t:
(1 )
I n tercon n ecti on of protecti ve con d u ctor(s) an d th e PE termi n al
(2)
Con n ecti on of exposed con d u cti ve parts
(3)
Protecti ve con d u ctor con n ected to an el ectri cal eq u i pm en t mou n ti n g pl ate u sed as a protecti ve
con d u ctor
(4)
Con n ecti on of con d u cti ve stru ctu ral parts of th e el ectri cal eq u i pmen t
(5)
Con d u cti ve stru ctu ral parts of th e m ach i n e
Parts con n ected to th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i t wh i ch are n ot to be u sed as protecti ve con du ctor:
(6)
M etal d u cts of fl exi bl e or ri gi d con stru cti on
(7)
M etal l i c cabl e sh eath s or arm ou ri n g
(8)
M etal l i c pi pes con tai n i n g fl ammabl e m ateri al s
(9)
Extran eou s-con d u cti ve-parts, i f earth ed i n d epen d en tl y from th e power su ppl y of th e m ach i n e an d
l i abl e to i n trod u ce a poten ti al , gen eral l y th e earth poten ti al , (see 1 7. 2 d )), e. g . :
m etal l i c pi pes,
fen ces,
l ad d ers,
h an d rai l s.
(1 0)
Fl exi bl e or pl i abl e m etal con d u i ts
(1 1 )
Protecti ve bon d i n g of su pport wi res, cabl es tray an d cabl e l ad d ers
(1 2 )
Fu n cti on al bon d i n g
T1
Au xi l i ary tran sform er
U1
M ou n ti n g pl ate of el ectri cal eq u i pmen t
Con n ecti on s to th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i t for fu n cti on al reason s:
Leg en d to referen ce d esi g n ati on s:
Figu re 4 – Example of equ ipotential bonding
for electrical equ ipment of a machine
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
8.2
– 47 –
Protective bonding circuit
8.2.1
General
The protective bond ing circuit consists of the in terconnection of:
•
PE terminal(s) (see 5. 2);
•
th e protective cond uctors (see 3. 1 . 51 ) in th e equ ipmen t of th e machine includ in g slid ing
con tacts where th ey are part of th e circuit;
•
th e con d uctive structural parts an d exposed cond uctive parts of the electrical equ ipmen t;
Exception: see 8. 2. 5.
•
conductive structural parts of the mach ine.
All parts of the protective bond in g circu it shall be so design ed that th ey are capable of
withstand ing th e h ighest thermal and mechanical stresses th at can be caused by earth-faul t
cu rren ts that could flow in that part of the protective bon ding circu it.
The cross-sectional area of every protective con ductor which d oes n ot form part of a cable or
wh ich is n ot in a common enclosu re with th e line conductor sh all be not less than
– 2, 5 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al if protection against mechanical d amage is provid ed ,
– 4 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al if protection against mech an ical damage is not provid ed .
N OTE
Th e u se of steel for a protecti ve con d u ctor i s n ot excl u d ed .
A protective cond uctor not forming part of a cable is consid ered to be mechan ical ly protected
if it is instal led in a condu it, tru nking or protected in a similar way. Cond uctive structural parts
of equipment in accordance with 6. 3. 2. 2 need n ot be connected to th e protective bond in g
circu it. Cond uctive structural parts of the machine need not be conn ected to the protective
bond in g circu it wh ere all the eq uipmen t provid ed is in accord ance with 6. 3. 2. 2.
Exposed con ductive parts of equ ipmen t in accord ance with 6. 3. 2. 3 shal l n ot be conn ected to
th e protective bond ing circuit.
I t is not n ecessary to connect exposed cond uctive parts to the protective bond ing circuit
wh ere those parts are moun ted so that they d o not constitute a hazard because:
–
–
th ey cannot be touched on l arge surfaces or grasped with the han d an d th ey are smal l in
size (less than approximatel y 50 mm × 50 mm); or
th ey are l ocated so that eith er con tact with live parts, or an insu lation fail ure, is u n likely.
Th is appl ies to small parts such as screws, rivets, and nameplates an d to parts inside an
encl osure, irrespective of th eir size (for example electromagn ets of contactors or relays an d
mech an ical parts of d evices).
8.2.2
Protective conductors
Protective cond uctors shal l be iden tified in accord ance with 1 3. 2. 2.
Copper cond uctors are preferred . Wh ere a conductor material other than copper is used , its
electrical resistance per u nit length shal l n ot exceed that of the al lowabl e copper cond uctor
and such conductors sh al l be n ot l ess than 1 6 mm 2 in cross-section al area for reasons of
mech an ical d urabil ity.
M etal enclosu res or frames or mou n ting plates of electrical equ ipmen t, conn ected to the
protective bond ing circuit, may be used as protective cond uctors if they satisfy the following
three requiremen ts:
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 48 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
•
th eir electrical con tin uity shal l be assured by construction or by suitable connection so as
to ensure protection against mech an ical, ch emical or electrochemical d eterioration ;
•
th ey compl y with th e requ iremen ts of 543. 1 of I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 ;
•
they shall permit the con nection of other protective cond uctors at every pred etermin ed
tap-off poin t.
The cross-sectional area of protective con d uctors shal l either be calcu lated in accordance
with 543. 1 . 2 of I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 , or selected in accordance with Tabl e 1 (see 5. 2). See
also 8. 2. 6. an d 1 7. 2 (d) of this d ocumen t.
Each protective cond uctor sh all :
•
be part of a mul ticore cable, or;
•
be in a common enclosure with the l in e con d uctor, or;
•
h ave a cross-sectional area of at least;
•
2, 5 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al if protection against mechan ical d amage is provid ed ;
•
4 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al if protection against mech an ical d amage is not provid ed .
N OTE 1
Th e u se of steel for a protecti ve con d u ctor i s n ot excl u d ed .
A protective cond uctor not forming part of a cable is consid ered to be mechan ical ly protected
if it is installed in a cond u it, tru nking or protected in a similar way.
The fol lowing parts of th e mach ine and its electrical equ ipmen t shall be connected to th e
protective bond ing circuit bu t shall not be used as protective cond uctors:
•
cond uctive structural parts of the mach in e;
•
metal d ucts of flexible or rigid construction ;
•
metallic cable sheaths or armouring;
•
metallic pipes con tain ing fl ammabl e materials such as gases, l iqu id s, powd er.
•
flexible or pliable metal cond u its;
•
constructional parts su bject to mechanical stress in n ormal service;
•
flexible metal parts; support wires; cable trays and cable lad ders.
N OTE 2 I n form ati on on cath od i c protecti on i s provi d ed i n 542 . 2. 5 an d 542. 2. 6 of I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 .
8.2.3
Continuity of the protective bonding circuit
Wh ere a part is removed for any reason (for example routin e main tenance), the protective
bond in g circu it for the remain ing parts sh al l n ot be interru pted .
Connection and bond ing poin ts sh al l be so d esigned that th eir curren t-carryin g capacity is not
impaired by mechan ical, chemical, or electroch emical influ ences. Where enclosures and
cond uctors of aluminium or aluminiu m al loys are used , particul ar consid eration sh ou ld be
given to the possibil ity of electrol ytic corrosion .
Wh ere th e electrical equ ipmen t is mou n ted on l ids, d oors, or cover plates, con tinu ity of the
protective bond ing circu it shal l be ensured an d a protective con d uctor (see 8. 2. 2) is
recommend ed . Where a protective cond uctor is not provided , fasten ings, hin ges or sl id ing
contacts d esign ed to have a l ow resistance sh all be used (see 1 8. 2. 2, Test 1 ).
The con tinuity of conductors in cabl es th at are exposed to d amage (for example fl exible
trail ing cables) shall be ensured by appropriate measures (for example monitoring).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 49 –
For requ irements for the con tinu ity of cond uctors usin g cond uctor wires, conductor bars and
slip-ring assemblies, see 1 2. 7. 2.
The protective bon ding circu it shall n ot incorporate a switch ing d evice, an overcurren t
protective d evice (for example switch , fuse), or other means of in terru ption .
Exception: links that cann ot be opened withou t th e use of a tool and that are located in an
encl osed el ectrical operating area may be provided for test or measuremen t purposes.
Wh ere th e con tinu ity of the protective bond in g circuit can be in terrupted by means of
removable cu rrent col lectors or plug/socket combinations, the protective bond ing circuit shall
be interrupted by a first make last break con tact. This also appl ies to removabl e or
withd rawable pl ug-in un its (see also 1 3. 4. 5).
8.2.4
Protective conductor connecting points
Al l protective cond uctors sh all be terminated in accord ance with 1 3. 1 . 1 . Th e protective
conductor connecting poin ts are not in tend ed , for example, to attach appl iances or parts.
Each protective cond uctor connecting poin t shall be marked or label led as such using the
symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9: 2006-08 as ill ustrated in Figure 5:
Figure 5 – Symbol IEC 6041 7-501 9: Protective earth
or with the letters PE, the graph ical symbol being preferred , or by use of th e bicolour
combin ation GREEN -AN D-YELLOW, or by any combin ation of these.
8.2.5
Mobile machines
On mobile machin es with on-board power supplies, the protective cond uctors, the conductive
structural parts of the el ectrical equ ipment, an d those extran eous-cond uctive-parts which form
the structure of the machine shall all be connected to a protective bon d ing terminal to provid e
protection against electric shock. Wh ere a mobile mach in e is also capable of being connected
to an external incoming power supply, this protective bond ing terminal sh al l be the connection
poin t for the extern al protective cond uctor.
N OTE Wh en th e su ppl y of el ectri cal en erg y i s sel f-con tai n ed wi th i n stati on ary, m obi l e, or m ovabl e i tems of
eq u i pm en t, an d wh en th ere i s n o extern al su ppl y con n ected (for exam pl e wh en an on -board battery ch arg er i s n ot
con n ected ), th ere i s n o n eed to con n ect su ch eq u i pm en t to an extern al protecti ve con d u ctor.
8.2.6
Additional requirements for electrical equipment having earth leakage currents
higher than 1 0 mA
Wh ere electrical eq uipmen t has an earth leakage curren t th at is greater th an 1 0 mA AC or DC
in any protective conductor, one or more of the fol lowing con ditions for th e in tegrity of each
section of the associated protective bond ing circuit th at carries the earth leakage cu rren t sh all
be satisfied :
a) th e protective cond uctor is compl etely encl osed with in electrical equ ipmen t encl osures or
otherwise protected throu ghou t its len gth against mech an ical d amage;
b) th e protective cond uctor h as a cross-sectional area of at least 1 0 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al ;
c) wh ere the protective con d uctor h as a cross-section al area of less than 1 0 mm 2 Cu or
1 6 mm 2 Al, a second protective cond uctor of at least the same cross-sectional area is
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 50 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
provid ed up to a poin t wh ere the protective conductor h as a cross-sectional area not less
th an 1 0 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al. Th is can req uire that th e el ectrical eq uipmen t h as a
separate terminal for a second protective cond uctor.
d ) the supply is au tomatical ly d isconnected in case of l oss of con tinu ity of the protective
conductor;
e) wh ere a plug-socket combination is u sed , an ind ustrial con nector in accord ance with
I EC 60309 series, with ad equ ate strain relief and a min imum protective earth ing cond uctor
cross-section of 2, 5 mm 2 as part of a mu lti-con d uctor power cable is provided .
A statemen t sh all be given in th e instructions for installation that the equ ipment sh all be
instal led as d escribed in th is 8. 2. 6.
N OTE A warn i n g l abel m ay al so be provi d ed ad j acen t to th e PE termi n al to state th at th e protecti ve con d u ctor
cu rren t exceed s 1 0m A.
8.3
Measures to restrict the effects of high leakage current
The effects of h igh l eakage curren t can be restricted to the equ ipmen t having high leakage
curren t by connection of that eq uipmen t to a ded icated suppl y transformer having separate
wind in gs. The protective bon ding circu it shal l be conn ected to exposed cond uctive parts of
th e eq uipmen t and , in ad dition, to th e second ary wind ing of th e transformer. The protective
cond uctor(s) between th e equ ipment an d th e second ary wind in g of the transformer shall
comply with one or more of the arrangements d escribed in 8. 2. 6.
8.4
Functional bonding
Protection against maloperation as a resu l t of insu lation failures can be achieved by
connectin g to a common cond uctor in accord ance with 9. 4. 3. 1 . 1 .
For recommen dations regard ing fu nctional bon ding
electromagnetic d istu rbances, see 4. 4. 2 an d Annex H .
to
avoid
maloperation
du e
to
Functional bond ing con necting points sh ou ld be marked or label led as such using th e symbol
I EC 6041 7-5020: 2002-1 0 (see Figure 6).
Figure 6 – Symbol IEC 6041 7-5020: Frame or chassis
9
Control circuits and control functions
9.1
Control circuits
9.1 .1
Control circuit supply
Where con trol circu its are suppl ied from an AC source, transformers havin g separate wind in gs
sh all be used to separate the power su ppl y from th e con trol supply.
Examples includ e:
•
con trol transformers havin g separate wind in gs in accord ance with I EC 61 558-2-2,
•
switch mode power su ppl y un its in accordance with I EC 61 558-2-1 6 fitted with
transformers h aving separate win d ings,
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
•
– 51 –
low vol tage power suppl ies in accordance with I EC 61 204-7 fitted with transformers having
separate wind ings.
Wh ere several transformers are used , it is recommend ed that the wind ings of those
transformers be con nected in such a man ner th at th e second ary voltages are in phase.
Exception : Transformers or switch mod e power suppl y u n its fitted with transformers are not
man d atory for mach ines with a single motor starter and /or a maximu m of two con trol d evices
(for example, in terl ock d evice, start/stop con trol station).
Wh ere DC con trol circuits d erived from an AC suppl y are conn ected to the protective bond in g
circu it (see 8. 2. 1 ), they sh al l be suppl ied from a separate wind in g of the AC con trol circuit
transformer or by anoth er control circuit transformer.
9.1 .2
Control circuit voltages
The nominal valu e of the con trol voltage shal l be consisten t with th e correct operation of th e
con trol circuit.
The nomin al vol tage of AC con trol circu its sh ou ld preferably not exceed
–
–
230 V for circuits with 50 H z n omin al frequ ency,
277 V for circuits with 60 H z n omin al frequ ency.
The nomin al vol tage of DC con trol circu its sh ou ld preferably not exceed 220 V.
9.1 .3
Protection
Con trol circu its shall be provid ed with overcu rrent protection in accord ance with 7. 2. 4
and 7. 2. 1 0.
9.2 Control functions
9.2.1 General
N OTE Su bcl au se 9. 2 d oes n ot speci fy req u i rem en ts for th e d evi ces u sed to i mpl emen t con trol fu n cti on s.
Exam pl es of req u i remen ts for d evi ces are gi ven i n Cl au se 1 0.
9.2.2
Categories of stop functions
There are three categories of stop functions as foll ows:
–
stop category 0:
–
stop category 1 :
–
stop category 2:
stopping by immed iate removal of power to the mach in e actu ators (i. e.
an uncon troll ed stop – see 3. 1 . 64);
a con troll ed stop (see 3. 1 . 1 4) with power avail able to the machine
actuators to ach ieve the stop and th en removal of power when the
stop is ach ieved ;
a con troll ed stop with power remaining available to the machin e
actuators.
N OTE For rem oval of power i t can be su ffi ci en t to rem ove th e power n eed ed to g en erate a torq u e or force. Th i s
can be ach i eved by d ecl u tch i n g , d i scon n ecti n g , swi tch i n g off, or by el ectron i c m ean s (e. g . a PDS i n accord an ce
wi th I EC 61 800 seri es), etc.
9.2.3 Operation
9.2.3.1
General
Safety functions and /or protective measures (for example in terlocks (see 9. 3)) sh all be
provided where requ ired to red uce the possibil ity of hazard ous situations.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 52 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Wh ere a mach in e h as more than one con trol station, measu res sh all be provid ed to ensure
th at initiation of comman ds from d ifferent con trol stations do n ot lead to a h azard ous situation .
9.2.3.2
Start
Start functions shall operate by energizing the rel evan t circuit.
The start of an operation sh all be possible onl y when all relevant safety functions and /or
protective measures are in place and are operation al, except for con d itions as d escribed in
9. 3. 6.

For th ose machines (for example mobile machin es) where safety functions an d /or protective
measures cannot be applied for certain operations, startin g of such operations shall be by
hold -to-run con trols, together with enabl in g d evices, as appropriate.
The provision of acoustic and/or visual warning signals before the starting of hazardous machine
operation shall be considered during the risk assessment. Where the risk assessment determines
that either or both are required the emission level of noise/light shall be suitable for the intended
environment.

Su itabl e interlocks shall be provided where necessary for correct sequ en tial starting.
I n the case of machin es requiring the use of more than one con trol station to initiate a start,
each of th ese control stations shal l h ave a separate man ual l y actu ated start con trol d evice.
The cond itions to initiate a start shal l be:
•
all required cond itions for mach in e operation shall be met, and
•
all start control devices shal l be in the released (off) position , then
•
all start con trol d evices sh all be actuated concurren tl y (see 3. 1 . 7).
9.2.3.3
Stop
Stop category 0 an d /or stop category 1 and /or stop category 2 stop functions shal l be
provid ed as ind icated by the risk assessmen t and the function al req uirements of th e mach in e
(see 4. 1 ).
N OTE 1
Th e su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g d evi ce (see 5. 3) wh en operated ach i eves a stop category 0.
Stop functions shall overrid e related start functions.
Wh ere more than one con trol station is provided , stop comman ds from an y control station
sh all be effective when required by th e risk assessmen t of the machine.
N OTE 2 Wh en stop fu n cti on s are i n i ti ated , i t can be n ecessary to d i scon ti n u e m ach i n e fu n cti on s oth er th an
m oti on .
9.2.3.4
9.2.3.4.1
Emergency operations (emergency stop, emergency switching off)
General
Emergency stop and emergency switch ing off are complemen tary protective measu res that
are n ot primary means of risk red uction for hazard s (for exampl e trapping, en tan gl emen t,
electric shock or burn) at a mach ine (see I SO 1 21 00).
Th is part of I EC 60204 specifies the requ iremen ts for the emergency stop and the emergency
switch ing off functions of the emergency operations listed in Annex E, both of wh ich are
in tend ed to be initiated by a single hu man action.
Once active operation of an emergency stop (see 1 0. 7) or emergency switchin g off (see 1 0. 8)
actuator h as ceased followin g a stop or switch in g off comman d , th e effect of th is command
sh al l be sustain ed until it is reset. Th is reset shal l be possible on ly by a manu al action at the
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 53 –
d evice wh ere the command h as been in itiated . Th e reset of th e command shal l not restart the
mach in ery but onl y permit restarting.
I t shal l not be possible to restart the mach inery u ntil al l emergency stop command s have been
reset. I t shal l n ot be possible to reenergize the machinery u n til all emergency switch in g off
command s have been reset.
9.2.3.4.2
Emergency stop
Requ irements for function al aspects of emergency stop eq uipmen t are given in I SO 1 3850.
The emergency stop shal l function eith er as a stop category 0 or as a stop category 1 . Th e
ch oice of th e stop category of the emergency stop d epends on the resu l ts of a risk
assessment of the machin e.
Exception: I n some cases, to avoid creating ad d itional risks, it can be n ecessary to perform a
con trol led stop an d maintain th e power to machine actuators even after stopping is ach ieved .
The stopped con d ition shall be monitored an d upon d etection of failure of the stopped
cond ition , power sh al l be removed withou t creating a hazard ous situation .
I n ad d ition to the requiremen ts for stop given in 9. 2. 3. 3, the emergency stop fu nction has the
fol lowing requ iremen ts:
•
it shal l override al l other fu nctions and operations in all modes;
•
it shall stop th e hazard ous motion as q uickly as practicable withou t creating other hazard s;
•
reset sh al l not in itiate a restart.
9.2.3.4.3
Emergency switching off
The fu nctional aspects of emergency switch ing off are given in 536. 4 of I EC 60364-5-53: 2001 .
Emergency switch ing off sh ou ld be provid ed where:
•
basic protection (for example for conductor wires, cond uctor bars, slip-ring assemblies,
con trolgear in el ectrical operating areas) is achieved on l y by pl acing out of reach or by
obstacles (see 6. 2. 6); or
•
th ere is the possibil ity of other h azard s or d amage caused by electricity.
Emergency switch ing off is accomplished by switching off the relevant su pply by
electromechanical switch in g d evices, effectin g a stop category 0 of mach ine actu ators
connected to th is incoming suppl y. Wh en a mach in e cann ot tol erate th is category 0 stop, it
may be necessary to provid e oth er measures, for example basic protection , so th at
emergency switch ing off is not necessary.
9.2.3.5
Operating modes
Each mach in e can have one or more operating mod es (for exampl e man ual mode, automatic
mod e, settin g mode, main tenance mod e) d etermin ed by the type of mach in e an d its
application .
Wh ere machin ery has been designed and constructed to allow its use in several con trol or
operating mod es req u irin g d ifferent protective measures an d having a d ifferen t impact on
safety, it shal l be fitted with a mod e selector wh ich can be locked in each position (for
example key operated switch). Each position of the selector shal l be clearl y id en tifiabl e an d
sh al l correspond to a sin gl e operating or con trol mod e.
The selector may be replaced by another selection method wh ich restricts the use of certain
fu nctions of the mach inery to certain categories of operator (for example access cod e).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 54 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
M od e sel ection by itself sh all not in itiate machine operation . A separate actuation of the start
control sh all be requ ired .
For each specific operating mod e, th e relevan t safety functions an d /or protective measures
sh al l be implemen ted .
I n d ication of th e sel ected operatin g mod e sh all be provided (for example the position of a
mod e selector, the provision of an ind icatin g l igh t, a visu al d isplay in dication).
9.2.3.6
Monitoring of command actions
M ovemen t or action of a machin e or part of a mach in e that can resu l t in a hazardous situation
shal l be mon itored by provid ing, for example, overtravel limiters, motor overspeed d etection ,
mech an ical overload d etection or an ti-col lision devices.
N OTE On som e m an u al l y con trol l ed m ach i n es (for exam pl e, m an u al d ri l l i n g m ach i n e), operators provi d e
m on i tori n g .
9.2.3.7
Hold-to-run controls
H old -to-run controls shal l requ ire continuous actuation of th e con trol d evice(s) to ach ieve
operation .
9.2.3.8
Two-hand control
Three types of two-h and con trol are d efined in I SO 1 3851 , th e selection of wh ich is
d etermined by the risk assessment. These shal l have th e followin g features:
Type I : th is type requ ires:
•
th e provision of two control d evices and th eir concurrent actu ation by both han ds;
•
con tinuous concurren t actu ation d uring the h azardous situation;
•
mach in e operation shall cease upon the rel ease of either one or both of the con trol
d evices when hazard ous situations are stil l present.
A Type I two-hand con trol d evice is not consid ered to be suitable for the initiation of
h azard ous operation.
Type I I : a Type I con trol req uiring th e release of both con trol d evices before mach ine
operation can be reinitiated .
Type I I I : a Type I I con trol requ iring concurren t actu ation of the con trol d evices as fol lows:
•
it shal l be n ecessary to actuate the con trol devices within a certain time limit of each
other, n ot exceed ing 0, 5 s;
•
wh ere th is time l imit is exceed ed , both con trol d evices sh all be released before mach ine
operation can be in itiated .
9.2.3.9
Enabling control
En abling control (see also 1 0. 9) is a man uall y activated con trol fu nction in terlock th at:
a) wh en activated allows a mach ine operation to be initiated by a separate start con trol , and
b) wh en d e-activated
•
initiates a stop function , and
•
preven ts initiation of mach in e operation.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 55 –
En abling con trol shal l be so arranged as to minimize the possibil ity of defeating, for exampl e
by requ iring th e d e-activation of the enablin g con trol d evice before machine operation may be
reinitiated .
9.2.3.1 0
Combined start and stop controls
Push-buttons and similar con trol d evices that, when operated , alternatel y initiate and stop
motion shall onl y be provided for fu nctions which cannot resu lt in a hazardous situation.
9.2.4
9.2.4.1
Cableless control system (CCS)
General requirements
Su bclause 9. 2. 4 d eals with the fu nctional req uiremen ts of con trol systems employing
cabl el ess (for exampl e rad io, in fra-red) techn iques for transmittin g con trol signals an d d ata
between operator con trol station(s) and other parts of the con trol system(s).

N OTE 1
Referen ce to a m ach i n e i n 9. 2. 4 i s i n ten d ed to be read as “m ach i n e or part(s) of a m ach i n e”.

Where a safety function of a CCS relies on data transmission the transmission reliability shall be
considered.
The CCS shal l have fu nction ality and a response time su itable for th e application based on
the risk assessmen t.
N OTE 2 I E C 61 784-3 d escri bes com mu n i cati on fai l u res of com mu n i cati on n etworks an d req u i rem en ts for safetyrel ated d ata tran sm i ssi on .
N OTE 3 Fu rth er req u i remen ts for cabl el ess con trol system s are u n d er d evel opm en t by I EC TC 44 i n d raft
I EC 62745 1 .
9.2.4.2
Monitoring the ability of a cableless control system to control a machine
The ability of a cableless con trol system (CCS) to control a machine shal l be au tomatically
mon itored , either continuously or at su itable in tervals. Th e status of th is ability shall be clearly
ind icated (for exampl e, by an ind icatin g l igh t, a visu al d ispl ay ind ication , etc. )
I f th e commu nication signal is degraded in a manner that migh t lead to the loss of the ability
of a CCS to control a mach ine (e. g. , reduced signal level, l ow battery power) a warn ing to the
operator sh all be provid ed before the abil ity of th e CCS to control a machin e is lost.
Wh en the ability of a CCS to con trol a mach ine has been l ost for a time that is d etermin ed
from a risk assessmen t of th e application , an au tomatic stop of th e machine shall be in itiated .
N OTE I n some cases, for exam pl e, i n ord er to avoi d th i s au tom ati c stop g en erati n g an u n expected h azard ou s
con d i ti on , i t can be n ecessary for th e m ach i n e to g o to a pred eterm i n ed state before stoppi n g .
Restoration of the ability of a CCS to con trol a machine shall n ot restart th e mach in e. Restart
shal l requ ire a deliberate action , for example manu al actuation of a start button .
9.2.4.3
Control limitation
M easures sh al l be taken (e. g. coded transmission) to preven t the mach in e from respond ing to
sign als other th an th ose from th e in ten ded cableless operator con trol station(s).
Cabl el ess operator con trol station(s) sh al l onl y control the inten d ed machin e(s) and shall
affect on ly th e in ten ded mach in e functions.
___________
1
U n d er con si d erati on .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 56 –
9.2.4.4
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Use of multiple cableless operator control stations
Wh en more th an one cableless operator control station is used to con trol a mach ine, then :
•
onl y on e cableless operator con trol station sh all be enabled at a time except as necessary
for the operation of th e mach in e;
•
transfer of con trol from one cableless operator con trol station to another sh all requ ire a
d eliberate manual action at the con trol station that has con trol;
•
d uring machine operation , transfer of con trol shall on ly be possible when both cabl eless
operator control stations are set to the same mod e of machine operation and /or fu nction(s)
of the mach in e;
•
transfer of con trol shall not change th e sel ected mod e of machine operation and /or
fu nction(s) of th e machine;
•
each cableless operator con trol station th at h as control of the mach ine sh al l be provid ed
with an ind ication that it has con trol (by for example, the provision of an in dicating l igh t, a
visual d isplay ind ication).
N OTE
I n d i cati on s at oth er l ocati on s can be n ecessary as d eterm i n ed by th e ri sk assessm en t.
9.2.4.5
Portable cableless operator control stations
Portable cableless operator con trol stations sh al l be provid ed with means (for example key
operated switch , access cod e) to preven t un authorized use.
Each mach in e und er cableless control sh ou ld have an ind ication when it is u nd er cableless
con trol .
Wh en a portabl e cableless operator con trol station can be conn ected to one or more of
several mach in es, means shall be provid ed on the portable cabl eless operator control station
to select wh ich machine(s) is to be connected . Selecting a machine to be connected sh al l not
in itiate con trol command s.
9.2.4.6
Deliberate disabling of cableless operator control stations
Wh ere a cableless operator con trol station is d isabl ed when und er con trol, the associated
machin e shall meet th e requirements for loss of abil ity of a CCS to con trol a machine in
9. 2. 4. 2.
Where it is necessary to d isabl e a cableless operator con trol station withou t in terrupting
mach ine operation , means shall be provid ed (for example on the cableless operator con trol
station) to transfer con trol to another fixed or portable control station .
9.2.4.7
Emergency stop devices on portable cableless operator control stations
Emergency stop d evices on portable cableless operator con trol stations sh al l not be the sole
means of in itiating the emergency stop function of a machine.
Con fusion between active an d inactive emergency stop d evices shall be avoid ed by
appropriate d esign and in formation for use. See also I SO 1 3850.
9.2.4.8
Emergency stop reset
Restarting of cableless control after power loss, d isabl ing and re-en abling, loss of
commun ication , or failure of parts of the CCS shal l not resul t in a reset of an emergency stop
cond ition .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6

– 57 –
The instructions for use sh all state th at th e reset of an emergency stop cond ition in itiated by a
portable cableless operator con trol station shal l onl y be performed when it can be seen th at
th e reason for initiation h as been cleared .
Where the risk assessment show that resetting of an emergency stop actuator on the portable
cableless operator control station is not adequate then one or more supplementary fixed resets
shall be provided.

9.3
9.3.1
Protective interlocks
Reclosing or resetting of an interlocking safeguard
The recl osing or resetting of an in terlockin g safeguard sh al l n ot in itiate hazardous machin e
operation .
N OTE Req u i rem en ts for i n terl ocki n g gu ard s wi th a start fu n cti on (con trol g u ard s) are speci fi ed i n 6. 3. 3. 2. 5 of
I SO 1 2 1 00: 201 0.
9.3.2
Exceeding operating limits
Wh ere an operatin g l imit (for exampl e speed , pressure, position ) can be exceeded lead ing to
a hazardous situation , means shal l be provided to d etect wh en a pred etermined limit(s) is
exceed ed an d initiate an appropriate con trol action .
9.3.3
Operation of auxiliary functions
The correct operation of au xiliary fu nctions shal l be ch ecked by appropriate d evices (for
exampl e pressure sensors).
Wh ere the n on-operation of a motor or device for an auxiliary fu nction (for example
lubrication , su ppl y of coolan t, swarf removal ) can cause a hazardous situation , or cause
d amage to the machine or to the work in progress, appropriate in terlocking shall be provid ed .
9.3.4
Interlocks between different operations and for contrary motions
All con tactors, relays, and other con trol d evices th at con trol el emen ts of th e machine and th at
can cause a h azard ous situation when actuated at the same time (for example those wh ich
in itiate contrary motion), sh all be interlocked against incorrect operation .
Reversing contactors (for example th ose con troll ing the direction of rotation of a motor) shall
be interlocked in such a way that in n ormal service no short-circu it can occu r when switch ing.
Where, for safety or for continuous operation , certain fu nctions on the mach in e are req uired to
be in terrelated , proper co-ord in ation shall be ensu red by su itabl e interlocks. For a group of
mach ines working togeth er in a co-ord inated manner and havin g more than one con troll er,
provision shal l be made to co-ord inate the operations of th e controllers as n ecessary.
Wh ere a failu re of a mech an ical brake actuator can resu lt in th e brake bein g appl ied wh en the
associated mach in e actu ator is energized an d a hazard ous situation can resul t, in terlocks
sh al l be provid ed to switch off the machine actuator.
9.3.5
Reverse current braking
Wh ere brakin g of a motor is accomplished by cu rren t reversal , measures shall be provided to
preven t the motor starting in the opposite d irection at the en d of braking where th at reversal
can cause a hazard ous situation or d amage to th e machine or to the work in progress. For
th is purpose, a d evice operatin g excl usivel y as a function of time is not permitted .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 58 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Con trol circu its sh all be so arranged that rotation of a motor shaft, for exampl e by applying a
man ual force or an y oth er force causin g the sh aft to rotate after it h as stopped , sh al l n ot
resu lt in a hazard ous situ ation .
9.3.6
Suspension of safety functions and/or protective measures
Wh ere it is necessary to suspen d safety functions and /or protective measu res (for example for
setting or main ten ance purposes), th e control or operatin g mod e selector shall
simultaneously:
•
d isabl e all oth er operating (con trol ) modes;
•
permit operation on l y by th e use of a hol d-to-ru n d evice or by a similar con trol d evice
positioned so as to permit sight of the hazard ous elements;
•
permit operation of th e hazardous el emen ts on ly in red uced risk cond itions (e. g. red uced
speed , red uced power / force, step-by-step operation, e. g. with a l imited movemen t control
d evice);
•
preven t an y operation of h azard ous fu nctions by vol untary or in volun tary action on th e
mach in e's sensors.
I f th ese four con d itions can not be fu lfil led simu ltan eously, the con trol or operating mode
selector shal l activate other protective measures d esigned and constructed to ensure a safe
in tervention zone. I n ad dition , the operator shal l be abl e to con trol operation of th e parts he is
working on from th e ad justmen t poin t.
9.4
Control functions in the event of failure
9.4.1
General requirements
Where failu res or d istu rbances in the el ectrical eq uipmen t can cause a hazard ous situ ation or
d amage to th e mach ine or to th e work in progress, appropriate measures shall be taken to
minimize the probability of th e occu rrence of such failures or d isturbances. The requ ired
measures and the extent to wh ich they are implemented , either ind ivid ually or in combination,
d epend on th e level of risk associated with the respective application (see 4. 1 ).
Examples of such measures that can be appropriate inclu d e bu t are not limited to:
•
protective interl ocking of th e electrical circu it;
•
use of proven circuit tech niques and components (see 9. 4. 2. 2);
•
provision of partial or complete red un d ancy (see 9. 4. 2. 3) or d iversity (see 9. 4. 2. 4);
•
provision for functional tests (see 9. 4. 2. 5).
The el ectrical control system(s) shal l h ave an appropriate performance that has been
d etermined from the risk assessment of the mach in e.
The requ iremen ts for safety-related control functions of I EC 62061 an d /or I SO 1 3849-1 ,
I SO 1 3849-2 shal l apply.
Where fu nctions performed by th e electrical con trol system(s) have safety implications bu t
application of I EC 62061 lead s to a requ ired safety in tegrity less th an that requ ired by SI L 1 ,
compl iance with the requ iremen ts of th is part of I EC 60204 can lead to an ad eq uate
performance of the electrical con trol system(s).
Wh ere memory reten tion is achieved for example, by battery power, measu res shal l be taken
to prevent hazard ous situ ations arising from fail ure, un dervoltage or removal of the battery.
M eans shall be provid ed to prevent unau th orized or in ad verten t memory al teration by, for
example, req uiring th e use of a key, access cod e or tool .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 59 –
9.4.2 Measures to minimize risk in the event of failure
9.4.2.1 General
M easures to minimize risk in th e even t of fail ure inclu de bu t are not limited to:
•
use of proven circuit tech niques and componen ts;
•
provisions of partial or complete redun dancy;
•
provision of d iversity;
•
provision for fu nctional tests.
9.4.2.2
Use of proven circuit techniques and components
These measures includ e bu t are not limited to:
•
bond in g of control circu its to th e protective bond in g circuit for functional purposes
(see 9. 4. 3. 1 . 1 and Figure 4);
•
connection of con trol d evices in accord ance with 9. 4. 3. 1 . 1 ;
•
stopping by d e-energizing;
•
th e switching of al l control circuit cond uctors (for example both sid es of a coil) of th e
d evice bein g con trolled ;
•
switching devices h aving d irect open in g action (see I EC 60947-5-1 );
•
mon itorin g by:
– use of mechanical ly linked con tacts (see I EC 60947-5-1 );
– use of mirror con tacts (see I EC 60947-4-1 );
•
circuit d esign to red uce th e possibility of failures causing u ndesirable operations.
9.4.2.3
Provisions of partial or complete redundancy
By provid ing partial or complete red un d ancy, it is possible to minimize th e probability th at one
single failure in th e electrical circu it can resu l t in a hazardous situation . Red und ancy can be
effective in n ormal operation (on-l ine red und ancy) or d esign ed as special circu its th at take
over th e protective function (off-l ine red un d ancy) onl y where th e operatin g fu nction fails.
Where off-line red un d ancy which is n ot active d uring n ormal operation is provid ed , suitable
measures sh all be taken to ensure th at those con trol circui ts are available when req uired .
9.4.2.4
Provision of diversity
The use of con trol circuits h aving d ifferen t principles of operation , or usin g d ifferen t types of
componen ts or devices can red uce th e probability of hazard s resul ting from fau l ts and /or
failures. Examples includ e:
–
–
–
th e use of a combin ation of normally open and normall y closed con tacts;
th e use of d ifferen t types of con trol devices in the circu it(s);
th e combin ation of electromech an ical an d electron ic equipmen t
configurations.
in
red und an t
The combination of electrical an d non -electrical systems (for example mechan ical , hyd rau l ic,
pneu matic) may perform the red un d an t function an d provide the d iversity.
9.4.2.5
Provision for functional tests
Functional tests may be carried ou t au tomaticall y by the con trol system, or man uall y by
inspection or tests at start-up and at pred etermined in tervals, or a combination as appropriate
(see also 1 7. 2 and 1 8. 6).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 60 –
9.4.3
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Protection against malfunction of control circu its
9.4.3.1
Insu lation faults
9.4.3.1 .1
General
M easures shall be provided to red uce th e probabil ity that insul ation faults on any con trol
circu it can cause mal function such as u nin tention al starting, poten tiall y hazard ous motions, or
preven t stoppin g of the machin e.
The measures to meet th e requ iremen ts include bu t are not limited to th e fol lowing meth ods:
–
–
–
–
meth od
method
method
meth od
9.4.3.1 .2
a)
b)
c)
d)
Earthed control circu its fed by transformers;
N on-earthed con trol circu its fed by transformers;
Con trol circuits fed by transformer with an earth ed cen tre-tap wind ing;
Con trol circuits not fed by a transformer.
Method a) – Earthed control circuits fed by transformers
The common cond uctor shall be connected to th e protective bond in g circu it at the point of
su pply. All contacts, sol id state elemen ts, etc. , which are in tend ed to operate an
electromagnetic or other d evice (for example, a rel ay, ind icator ligh t) are to be inserted
between th e switched cond uctor of th e con trol circuit supply and on e terminal of th e coil or
d evice. The other terminal of th e coil or d evice is connected d irectly to the common cond uctor
of the con trol circu it supply without any switch ing elemen ts (see Figure 7).
I
>
1
1
3
3
2
2
IEC
1
Swi tch ed con d u ctors
2
Com m on con d u ctors
3
Con trol swi tch es
Figu re 7 – Method a) Earthed control circu it fed by a transformer
N OTE M eth od a) can be u sed al so for DC con trol ci rcu i ts. I n th i s case th e tran sformer sh own i n Fi g u re 7 i s
su bsti tu ted by a DC power su ppl y u n i t.
Exception : Con tacts of protective devices may be conn ected between th e common cond uctor
and the coils, provid ed th at th e connection is very short (for example in the same enclosu re)
so that an earth fau lt is u nl ikely (for exampl e overload relays d irectl y fitted to con tactors).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
9.4.3.1 .3
– 61 –
Method b) – N on-earthed control circu its fed by transformers
Control circuits fed from a con trol transformer that is not con nected to the protective bond ing
circu it sh all eith er:
1 ) h ave 2-pole con trol switches that operate on both conductors, see Figure 8; or
2) be provid ed with a d evice, for exampl e an insul ation monitoring device, th at in terrupts the
circuit au tomaticall y in th e even t of an earth fault, see Figu re 9; or
3) where an interruption as per item 2 above wou ld increase the risk, for example wh en
continued operation is requ ired d urin g th e first fault to earth, it can be su fficien t to provid e
an insu lation mon itoring d evice (e. g. in accord ance with I EC 61 557-8) that wil l initiate an
acoustic an d optical signal at the mach in e, see Figu re 1 0. Requiremen ts for the proced ure
to be performed by th e mach in e user in response to this alarm shall be d escribed in the
in formation for use.
I>
1
3
2
1
3
2
IEC
1
Swi tch ed con d u ctors
2
Com m on con d u ctors
3
Con trol swi tch es
Figure 8 – Method b1 ) N on-earthed control circuit fed by transformer
N OTE 1 M eth od b1 ) can be u sed al so for DC con trol ci rcu i ts. I n th i s case th e tran sform er sh own i n Fi g u re 8 i s
su bsti tu ted by a DC power su ppl y.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 62 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
I
>
1
1
3
R
3
2
2
IEC
1
Swi tch ed con d u ctors
2
Com m on con d u ctors
3
Con trol swi tch es
Figure 9 – Method b2) N on-earthed control circuit fed by transformer
N OTE 2 M eth od b2) can be u sed al so for DC con trol ci rcu i ts. I n th i s case th e tran sform er sh own i n Fi g u re 9 i s
su bsti tu ted by a DC power su ppl y.
N OTE 3 Fi g u re 9 d oes n ot sh ow th e overcu rren t protecti ve d evices i n th e m easu rem en t ci rcu i ts for protecti on of
th e i n su l ati on m on i tori n g d evi ce.
I
>
3
R
1
1
3
2
2
IEC
1
Swi tch ed con d u ctors
2
Com m on con d u ctors
3
Con trol swi tch es
Figure 1 0 – Method b3) N on-earthed control circu it fed by transformer
N OTE 4 M eth od b3) can be u sed al so for DC con trol ci rcu i ts. I n th i s case th e tran sform er sh own i n Fi g u re 1 0 i s
su bsti tu ted by a DC power su ppl y. Wh en a tran sform er an d recti fi er com bi n ati on i s u sed , th e i n su l ati on mon i tori n g
d evi ce i s con n ected to th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i t i n th e DC part of th e con trol ci rcu i t, so after th e recti fi er.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 63 –
N OTE 5 Fi g u re 1 0 d oes n ot sh ow th e overcu rren t protecti ve d evi ces i n th e m easu rem en t ci rcu i ts for protecti on of
th e i n su l ati on m on i tori n g d evi ce.
9.4.3.1 .4
Method c) – Control circu its fed by transformer with an earthed centre-tap
winding
Control circu its fed from a con trol transformer with its cen tre-tap wind in g connected to the
protective bond ing circu it sh all have overcurren t protective d evices th at break both th e
cond uctors.
The control switches shall be 2-pole types that operate on both cond uctors.
I>
1
3
2
1
3
2
IEC
1
Swi tch ed con d u ctors
2
Com m on con d u ctors
3
Con trol swi tch es
Figure 1 1 – Method c) Control circu its fed by transformer
with an earthed centre-tap winding
9.4.3.1 .5
Method d) – Control circu its not fed by a transformer
Con trol circu its that are not fed by a control transformer or switch mod e power suppl y units
fitted with transformers h aving separate wind ings in accordance with I EC 61 558-2-1 6 are on l y
al lowed for machin es with a maximum of one motor starter and /or maximum of two control
d evices, in accordance with 9. 1 . 1 .
Depen d ing on the earth ing of the suppl y system th e possible cases are:
1 ) d irectl y connected to an earthed su ppl y system (TN - or TT-system) and :
a) being powered between a l ine cond uctor an d the n eutral cond uctor, see Figure 1 2; or
b) being powered between two l ine cond uctors, see Figure 1 3; or
2) d irectly connected to a supply system th at is n ot earth ed or is earthed throu gh a h igh
imped ance (I T-system) an d :
a) being powered between a line cond uctor an d the n eu tral cond uctor, see Figure 1 4; or
b) being powered between two line cond uctors, see Figure 1 5.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 64 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
M eth od d1 b) requires mu l ti-pole con trol switches that switch all live cond uctors in ord er to
avoid an un in ten tion al start in case of an earth faul t in the con trol circuit.
M eth od d 2) requ ires that a d evice shal l be provid ed that in terrupts the circu it au tomaticall y in
th e even t of an earth fault.
L1
L2
I
M
>
L3
N
control switch
IEC
Figu re 1 2 – Method d1 a) Control circuit without transformer connected between a phase
and the neutral of an earthed supply system
N OTE 1 Fi g u re 1 2 sh ows th e case wh ere th e su ppl y system i s a TN system . Th e con trol ci rcu i t i s th e sam e i n th e
case of a TT system .
N OTE 2 Fi g u re 1 2 d oes n ot sh ow an y protecti ve d evi ces for th e power ci rcu i t an d con trol ci rcu i t, provi si on s for
wh i ch are stated i n 6. 3 an d 7. 2.
L1
L2
I
M
>
L3
control switch
IEC
Figu re 1 3 – Method d1 b) Control circu it without transformer connected between two
phases of an earthed su pply system
N OTE 3 Fi g u re 1 3 sh ows th e case wh ere th e su ppl y system i s a TN system. Th e con trol ci rcu i t i s th e sam e in
case of a TT system .
N OTE 4 Fi g u re 1 3 d oes n ot sh ow an y n ecessary protecti ve d evi ces for power ci rcu i t an d con trol ci rcu i t, provi si on s
for wh i ch are stated i n 6. 3 an d 7. 2.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 65 –
L1
L2
I
M
>
L3
N
control switch
R
IEC
Figure 1 4 – Method d2a) Control circu it withou t transformer connected between phase
and neutral of a non-earthed supply system
N OTE 5 Fi g u re 1 4 d oes n ot sh ow an y n ecessary protective d evi ces for th e power ci rcu i t an d con trol ci rcu i t,
provi si on s for wh i ch are stated i n 6. 3 an d 7. 2 .
L1
L2
I
M
>
L3
control switch
R
IEC
Figu re 1 5 – Method d2b) control circuit without transformer connected between two
phases of a non-earthed su pply system
N OTE 6 Fi g u re 1 5 d oes n ot sh ow an y n ecessary protecti ve d evi ces for power ci rcu i t an d con trol ci rcu i t, provi si on s
for wh i ch are stated i n 6. 3 an d 7. 2.
9.4.3.2
Voltage interruptions
See also 7. 5.
Wh ere the con trol system uses a memory d evice(s), proper fu nction ing in the even t of power
failure shal l be ensured (for example by using a n on-vol atile memory) to prevent an y l oss of
memory that can resul t in a hazard ous situ ation .
9.4.3.3
Loss of circuit continu ity
Wh ere the loss of con tin uity of con trol circuits d epend ing upon slid ing con tacts can resul t in a
h azard ous situation , appropriate measures shall be taken (for example by d u pl ication of the
sliding con tacts).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 66 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
1 0 Operator interface and machine-mounted control devices
1 0.1 General
1 0.1 .1 General requirements
Control d evices for operator in terface shal l, as far as is practicable, be selected , moun ted ,
and iden tified or cod ed in accord ance with I EC 61 31 0 series.
The possibility of in ad verten t operation shall be min imized by, for example, positioning of
d evices, su itable d esign , provision of add itional protective measures. Particu lar consid eration
sh all be given to the sel ection, arran gement, programmin g and use of operator inpu t devices
such as touchscreens, keypads an d keyboards for the con trol of hazard ous mach ine
operations, and of sensors (for example position sensors) th at can in itiate mach ine operation .
Further in formation can be fou nd in I EC 60447.
Ergonomic principles shall be taken in to accoun t in th e l ocation of operator interface d evices.
1 0.1 .2 Location and mounting
As far as is practicable, mach ine-mou n ted con trol d evices shall be:
•
read il y accessible for service and main tenance;
•
mou n ted in such a mann er as to min imize the possibility of d amage from activities such as
material h and ling.
The actuators of han d-operated con trol d evices sh all be selected an d instal led so that:
•
they are not less th an 0, 6 m above th e servicing level an d are within easy reach of the
normal working position of the operator;
•
th e operator is not placed in a hazard ous situation when operatin g them.
The actuators of foot-operated con trol d evices shal l be selected and installed so th at:
•
th ey are with in easy reach of the normal working position of the operator;
•
th e operator is not pl aced in a hazard ous situation when operating them.
1 0.1 .3 Protection
The degree of protection (I P rating in accordance with I EC 60529) togeth er with oth er
appropriate measures sh all provid e protection against:
•
the effects of l iq uid s, vapours, or gases found in the physical en vironmen t or used on th e
mach ine;
•
the ingress of con taminants (for example swarf, d ust, particulate matter).
I n add ition , th e operator in terface con trol d evices shall h ave a min imu m d egree of protection
against contact with l ive parts of I PXXD in accord ance with I EC 60529.
1 0.1 .4 Position sensors
Position sensors (for example position switches, proximity switches) shal l be so arranged that
th ey wil l not be d amaged in th e even t of overtravel .
Position sensors in circuits with safety-related con trol fu nctions (for example, to main tain the
safe cond ition of th e machine or prevent hazard ous situations arisin g at the machine) sh al l
h ave d irect open ing action (see I EC 60947-5-1 ) or shal l provid e similar rel iabil ity (see 9. 4. 2).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 67 –
1 0.1 .5 Portable and pendant control stations
Portable and pend an t operator con trol stations and their con trol d evices shal l be so selected
and arran ged as to minimize the possibility of mach ine operations caused by inad verten t
actuation, sh ocks and vibrations (for example if th e operator con trol station is dropped or
strikes an obstruction) (see also 4. 4. 8).
1 0.2 Actuators
1 0.2.1 Colours
Actuators (see 3. 1 . 1 ) shal l be colour-coded as foll ows.
The col ours for START/ON actuators sh ould be WH I TE, GREY, BLACK or GREEN with a
preference for WH I TE. RED shal l n ot be used .
The col our RED sh al l be used for emergency stop an d emergency switch ing off actuators
(includ ing su ppl y d iscon necting devices wh ere it is foreseen th at they are for use in an
emergency). I f a background exists immed iately around the actu ator, th en this background
shal l be coloured YELLOW. The combination of a RED actuator with a YELLOW background
shal l only be used for emergency operation d evices.
The colou rs for STOP/OFF actuators shoul d be BLACK, GREY, or WH I TE with a preference
for BLACK. GREEN shall not be used . RED is permitted , bu t it is recommend ed that RED is
n ot used near an emergency operation d evice.
WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK are the preferred colours for actu ators th at al ternately act as
START/ON and STOP/OFF actu ators. The colours RED, YELLOW, or GREEN sh al l not be
used .
WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK are the preferred col ou rs for actu ators that cause operation wh ile
th ey are actu ated and cease the operation when th ey are released (for example h ol d-to-ru n).
The col ours RED, YELLOW, or GREEN sh al l n ot be used .
Reset actuators shall be BLU E, WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK. Wh ere th ey also act as a
STOP/OFF actuator, the colours WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK are preferred with the main
preference being for BLACK. GREEN sh all n ot be used .
The col our YELLOW is reserved for use in abnormal cond itions, for example, in the even t of
an abnormal cond ition of the process, or to in terru pt an au tomatic cycle.
Where the same col our WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK is used for various fu nctions (for exampl e
WH I TE for START/ON and for STOP/OFF actu ators) a suppl emen tary means of cod ing (for
example shape, position , symbol) shal l be used for the id en tification of actu ators.
1 0.2.2 Markings
I n ad dition to the functional iden tification as d escribed in 1 6. 3, recommend ed symbols to be
placed n ear to or preferabl y d irectl y on certain actuators are given in Table 2 or 3.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 68 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Table 2 – Symbols for actuators (Power)
Power
ON
OFF
ON /OFF
(pu sh on -pu sh off)
ON
(h ol d -to-ru n )
I EC 6041 7-5007
I EC 6041 7-5008
I EC 6041 7-501 0
I EC 6041 7-501 1
(2002-1 0)
(2002-1 0)
(2002-1 0)
(2002-1 0)
Table 3 – Symbols for actuators (Machine operation)
Machine operation
1 0.3
1 0.3.1
START
STOP
H OLD-TO-RU N
EM ERG EN CY STOP
I E C 6041 7-51 04
I EC 6041 7-51 1 0A
I EC 6041 7-501 1
I EC 6041 7-5638
(2006-08)
(2004-06)
(2002-1 0)
(2002-1 0)
Indicator lights and displays
General
I nd icator ligh ts and d isplays serve to give the fol lowin g types of in formation :
–
–
ind ication : to attract the operator's atten tion or to ind icate th at a certain task shou ld be
performed . The colours RED, YELLOW, BLU E, an d GREEN are normall y used in th is
mod e; for flash in g ind icator l igh ts an d d isplays, see 1 0. 3. 3.
con firmation: to con firm a command , or a cond ition , or to con firm th e termination of a
ch ange or transition period . The colours BLU E an d WH I TE are n ormal l y used in th is mod e
and GREEN may be used in some cases.
I nd icator l igh ts and d isplays shal l be selected and instal led in such a man ner as to be visible
from th e normal position of the operator (see also I EC 61 31 0-1 ).
Circuits used for visual or au d ibl e d evices used to warn persons of an impend ing hazard ous
even t sh all be fitted with facilities to ch eck the operability of th ese d evices.
1 0.3.2
Colours
I nd icator ligh ts sh ou ld be colour-coded with respect to th e cond ition (status) of th e machine in
accord ance with Table 4.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 69 –
Table 4 – Colours for indicator lights and their meanings
with respect to the condition of the machine
Colou r
Meani ng
Explanation
Acti on by operator
RED
Em erg en cy
H azard ou s con d i ti on
I m m ed i ate acti on to d eal wi th h azard ou s
con d i ti on (for exam pl e swi tch i n g off th e
m ach i n e su ppl y, bei n g al ert to th e h azard ou s
con d i ti on an d stayi n g cl ear of th e m ach i n e)
YELLOW
Abn orm al
Abn orm al con d i ti on
I m pen d i n g cri ti cal con d i ti on
M on i tori n g an d /or i n terven ti on (for exam pl e by
re-establ i sh i n g th e i n ten d ed fu n cti on )
BLU E
M an d atory
I n d i cati on of a con d i ti on th at
req u i res acti on by th e operator
M an d atory acti on
G REEN
N orm al
N orm al con d i ti on
Opti on al
WH I TE
N eu tral
Oth er con d i ti on s; m ay be u sed
wh en ever d ou bt exi sts abou t
th e appl i cati on of RE D,
YELLOW, G RE EN , BLU E
M on i tori n g
I n d icating towers on mach in es shou ld h ave the applicable colours in th e foll owing ord er from
th e top d own; RED, YELLOW, BLU E, GREEN and WH I TE.
1 0.3.3
Flashing lights and displays
For further d istinction or in formation and especially to give ad d ition al emph asis, fl ash ing ligh ts
and d isplays can be provid ed for th e followin g purposes:
–
–
–
–
to
to
to
to
attract attention ;
request immed iate action ;
in d icate a d iscrepancy between the command and actual state;
in d icate a ch ange in process (flashin g du ring transition).
I t is recommend ed th at h igher flash ing freq uencies are used for higher priority in formation
(see I EC 60073 for recommended flashing rates and pulse/pause ratios).
Where flashing ligh ts or d isplays are used to provid e high er priority in formation , ad d itional
acoustic warn in gs shoul d be consid ered .
1 0.4
Illuminated push-buttons
I l lumin ated push-button actuators shal l be colou r-cod ed in accord ance with 1 0. 2. 1 . Wh ere
th ere is d ifficul ty in assigning an appropriate colour, WH I TE shal l be used .
The colour of active emergency stop actuators shall remain RED regard less of the state of the
il lu mination .
1 0.5
Rotary control devices
Devices having a rotational member, such as potentiometers an d selector switches, shal l
have means of preven tion of rotation of th e station ary member. Friction alon e shall not be
consid ered su fficien t.
1 0.6
Start devices
Actuators used to initiate a start function or the movemen t of mach in e elemen ts (for example
slid es, spind les, carriers) shall be constructed and moun ted so as to minimize inad verten t
operation.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 70 –
1 0.7
1 0.7.1
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Emergency stop devices
Location of emergency stop devices
Devices for emergency stop shall be read ily accessible.
Emergency stop d evices shall be provided at each location wh ere th e initiation of an
emergency stop can be requ ired .
There can be circumstances where con fusion can occur between active and inactive
emergency stop d evices caused by, for example, un pluggin g or otherwise d isabling an
operator con trol station . I n such cases, means (for example, d esign and in formation for use)
sh all be provided to minimise confusion .
1 0.7.2
Types of emergency stop device
The types of d evice for emergency stop includ e, bu t are not l imited to:
•
a push -bu tton device for actuation by th e palm or th e fist (e. g. mushroom head type);
•
a pu ll-cord operated switch ;
•
a ped al -operated switch withou t a mechan ical guard .
The d evices sh al l be in accord ance with I EC 60947-5-5.
1 0.7.3
Operation of the supply disconnecting device to effect emergency stop
Wh ere a stop category 0 is su itable, th e suppl y discon necting d evice may serve the function
of emergency stop where:
•
it is read il y accessible to the operator; and
•
it is of the type d escribed in 5. 3. 2 a), b), c), or d ).
Wh ere in tend ed for emergency use, th e supply d isconnecting d evice shal l meet the colour
requ iremen ts of 1 0. 2. 1 .
1 0.8
1 0.8.1
Emergency switching off devices
Location of emergency switching off devices
Emergency switch ing off d evices sh all be located as necessary for the given application .
N ormal ly, those d evices will be located separate from operator control stations. Where
con fusion can occur between emergency stop and emergency switch ing off d evices, means
shal l be provid ed to minimise con fusion .
N OTE Th i s can be ach i eved by, for exam pl e, th e provi si on of a break-gl ass en cl osu re for th e em erg en cy
swi tch i n g off d evi ce.
1 0.8.2
Types of emergency switching off device
The types of d evice for initiation of emergency switch ing off includ e:
•
a push -bu tton operated switch with a pal m or mush room head type of actuator;
•
a pu ll -cord operated switch.
The d evices shall have d irect opening action (see Annex K of I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003 and
I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003/AM D1 : 2009).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 71 –
1 0.8.3 Local operation of the supply disconnecting device to effect emergency
switching off
Where the su pply d isconn ecting d evice is to be locall y operated for emergency switch in g off,
it shall be read ily accessible and shall meet the colour requ iremen ts of 1 0. 2. 1 .
1 0.9
Enabling control device
The enabl ing con trol function is d escribed in 9. 2. 3. 9.
En abling con trol devices shall be selected and arran ged so as to minimize the possibility of
d efeatin g.
En abling control devices shal l be selected th at have the following featu res:
–
–
d esigned in accord ance with ergonomic principl es;
for a two-position type:
•
position 1 : off-fu nction of th e switch (actuator is not operated );
position 2: enabling function (actuator is operated ).
for a three-position type:
•
–
•
position 1 : off-function of th e switch (actuator is not operated );
•
position 2: en abling fu nction (actu ator is operated in its mid position );
•
position 3: off-function (actu ator is operated past its mid position);
•
when return in g from position 3 to position 2, the en abling fu nction is n ot activated .
N OTE
I EC 60947-5-8 speci fi es req u i rem en ts for th ree-posi ti on en abl i n g swi tch es.
1 1 Controlgear: location, mounting, and enclosures
1 1 .1
General requirements
Al l con trolgear shall be located and mou n ted so as to facil itate:
–
–
–
its accessibil ity and maintenance;
its protection against the external in flu ences or con d itions u nd er wh ich it is in ten ded to
operate;
operation and main tenance of the mach ine an d its associated equ ipmen t.
1 1 .2 Location and mounting
1 1 .2.1 Accessibility and maintenance
All items of con trolgear shall be placed and oriented so that they can be iden tified with ou t
moving them or th e wiring. For items that requ ire checking for correct operation or th at are
l iable to n eed replacement, those actions should be possible with ou t d isman tlin g other
equ ipmen t or parts of th e machine (except opening d oors or removing covers, barriers or
obstacles). Terminals not part of controlgear componen ts or devices sh al l also con form to
th ese requiremen ts.
All con trolgear sh all be mou nted so as to facilitate its operation and maintenance. Where a
special tool is necessary to ad j ust, main tain , or remove a d evice, such a tool sh al l be
su pplied . Wh ere access is requ ired for regu lar maintenance or ad justmen t, the rel evant
d evices shall be l ocated between 0, 4 m and 2, 0 m above th e servicin g level . I t is
recommend ed that termin als be at least 0, 2 m above the servicing level an d be so placed that
conductors and cabl es can be easily connected to them.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 72 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
N o d evices except d evices for operating, ind icatin g, measuring, and cooling shall be mou n ted
on doors or on access covers of encl osu res th at are expected to be removed .
Wh ere con trol devices are con nected through plu g-in arran gemen ts, their association shall be
mad e clear by type (sh ape), marking or reference designation , singl y or in combin ation
(see 1 3. 4. 5).
Pl ug-in d evices that are hand led d uring normal operation sh al l be provid ed with non in terchangeable features wh ere th e lack of such a facil ity can resu lt in mal functioning.
Pl ug/socket combinations that are hand led d uring normal operation shal l be located and
mou n ted so as to provid e unobstructed access.
Test points for connection of test equipmen t, where provid ed , sh al l be:
–
–
–
–
mou n ted so as to provid e unobstructed access;
clearl y id entified to correspond with th e d ocumentation;
ad eq uatel y insulated ;
su fficien tl y spaced .
1 1 .2.2
Physical separation or grouping
N on-electrical parts and d evices, not d irectly associated with th e electrical equipmen t, shall
not be located with in enclosures con taining controlgear. Devices such as sol enoid valves
sh ou ld be separated from the oth er electrical equ ipment (for example in a separate
compartment).
Con trol devices mounted in th e same l ocation an d connected to the power circu its, or to both
power and con trol circuits, shoul d be grouped separately from th ose connected only to the
con trol circuits.
Terminals sh all be separated in to groups for:
–
–
–
power circuits;
con trol circuits of th e mach in e;
other con trol circu its, fed from external sources (for example for interlockin g).
The grou ps may be mou n ted ad jacen tl y, provid ed that each group can be read il y id en tified
(for example by markings, by use of d ifferen t sizes, by use of barriers or by col ours).
Wh en arrangin g th e location of d evices (inclu ding interconnections), th e clearances and
creepage d istances specified for them by the supplier sh all be main tained , takin g into accoun t
th e external influences or cond itions of the ph ysical en viron men t.
1 1 .2.3
Heating effects
The temperature rise insid e electrical equ ipmen t enclosu res shall not exceed the ambien t
temperatu re specified by the componen t manu facturers.
N OTE 1
I EC TR 60890 can be u sed for th e cal cu l ati on of tem peratu re ri se i n si d e en cl osu res.
H eat generating componen ts (for example h eat sinks, power resistors) shall be so located th at
th e temperature of each componen t in the vicinity remains with in the permitted limit.
N OTE 2 I n form ati on on th e sel ecti on of i n su l ati n g m ateri al s to resi st th erm al stresses i s g i ven i n I EC 602 1 6 an d
I EC 60085.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
1 1 .3
– 73 –
Degrees of protection
The protection of con trolgear against ingress of solid foreign objects and of l iq uid s shal l be
adeq uate taking in to accoun t the external in fluences u nder wh ich the machine is in tend ed to
operate (i. e. the location and the ph ysical en vironmen tal cond itions) an d shall be su fficien t
against d ust, cool an ts, lu bricants and swarf.
N OTE 1 Th e d eg rees of protecti on agai n st i n g ress of water are covered by I EC 60529. Ad d i ti on al protecti ve
m easu res can be n ecessary ag ai n st oth er l i q u i d s.
Enclosures of con trolgear shall provid e a degree of protection of at least I P22 (see
I EC 60529).
Exception : an enclosu re provid ing a minimu m d egree of protection I P22 is n ot req uired where:
a) an electrical operatin g area provid es an appropriate degree of protection against ingress
of sol id s and l iqu id s, or:
b) removable collectors on cond uctor wire or con ductor bar systems are used and the
measures of 1 2. 7. 1 are appl ied .
N OTE 2 Some exam pl es of appl i cation s, al on g wi th th e d eg ree of protecti on typi cal l y provi d ed by th ei r
en cl osu res, are l i sted bel ow:
–
ven ti l ated en cl osu re, con tai n i n g on l y m otor starter resi stor an d oth er l arg e si ze eq u i pm en t
I P1 0
–
ven ti l ated en cl osu re, con tai n i n g oth er eq u i pm en t
I P32
–
en cl osu re u sed i n g en eral i n d u stry
I P32 , I P43
an d I P54
–
en cl osu re u sed i n l ocati on s th at are cl ean ed wi th l ow-pressu re water j ets (h osi n g )
I P55
–
en cl osu re provi d i n g protecti on ag ai n st fi n e d u st
I P65
–
en cl osu re con tai n i n g sl i p-ri n g assem bl i es
I P2 X
Depen d i n g u pon th e con d i ti on s wh ere i n stal l ed , an oth er d eg ree of protecti on can be appropri ate.
1 1 .4
Enclosures, doors and openings
Enclosures sh all be constructed using materials capable of withstand ing the mechan ical ,
electrical and thermal stresses as wel l as the effects of humidity an d other environ mental
factors that are likely to be encoun tered in n ormal service.
Fasten ers used to secure doors an d covers sh ou ld be of the captive type.
Windows of enclosures shall be of a material suitable to withstand expected mechan ical
stress and ch emical attack.
I t is recommend ed that enclosure doors having vertical h inges be not wid er th an 0, 9 m, with
an an gle of open in g of at least 95° .
The j oin ts or gaskets of doors, l id s, covers and enclosures shal l withstand the chemical
effects of th e aggressive liq uids, vapou rs, or gases used on the mach ine. The means
provid ed to main tain the d egree of protection of an enclosure on doors, l ids and covers th at
require opening or removal for operation or mainten ance shall:
•
be secu rely attached to eith er th e d oor/cover or th e enclosure;
•
not d eteriorate du e to removal or repl acemen t of the d oor or the cover, and so impair the
d egree of protection.
Wh ere openings in enclosures are provid ed (for exampl e, for cable access), incl ud in g those
toward s the floor or found ation or to other parts of the machin e, means shal l be provid ed to
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 74 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
ensure th e d egree of protection specified for the equ ipmen t. Open ings for cabl e entries shall
be easy to re-open on site. A suitable open in g may be provid ed in the base of enclosures
with in th e machine so that moisture d ue to cond ensation can d rain away.
There sh all be n o open ing between enclosu res con tainin g electrical equ ipmen t and
compartments contain ing coolan t, lubricating or h yd raul ic fluid s, or th ose into which oil , other
liqu id s, or d ust can penetrate. Th is req uiremen t d oes not appl y to electrical d evices
specifical l y d esigned to operate in oil (for example electromagnetic clu tches) n or to electrical
equ ipmen t in which coolants are used .
Wh ere there are h oles in an enclosure for moun tin g pu rposes, means may be necessary to
ensure that after moun tin g, the holes d o not impair th e requ ired protection .


Eq uipmen t th at, in n ormal or abnormal operation , can attain a surface temperature su fficien t
to cause a risk of fire or
d etrimental
effect to an enclosure material sh all :
–
–
–
be l ocated with in an enclosure that wil l withstand , without risk of fire or harmfu l effect,
such temperatures as can be generated ; an d
be mounted and l ocated at a su fficien t d istance from adj acen t equ ipmen t so as to allow
safe d issipation of heat (see also 1 1 . 2. 3); or
be oth erwise screened by material th at can withstand , withou t risk of fire or harmfu l effect,
th e heat emitted by th e eq uipmen t.
N OTE
1 1 .5
A warn i n g l abel i n accord an ce wi th 1 6. 2 . 2 can be n ecessary.
Access to electrical equipment
Doors in gan gways and for access to electrical operating areas shal l :
–
–
–
be at least 0, 7 m wid e an d 2, 0 m high ;
open ou tward s;
have a means (for example pan ic bolts) to allow open in g from the insid e withou t the use of
a key or tool.
N OTE
Fu rth er i n form ati on is g i ven i n I E C 60364-7-729.
1 2 Conductors and cables
1 2.1
General requirements
Conductors and cables sh all be selected so as to be su itable for th e operating cond itions (for
exampl e voltage, cu rrent, protection against el ectric shock, grou ping of cabl es) and external
in fluences (for example ambien t temperature, presence of water or corrosive substances,
mechan ical stresses (incl ud in g stresses d urin g instal lation ), fire hazard s) th at can exist.
These requ iremen ts do not appl y to the in tegral wiring of assemblies, su bassemblies, and
d evices that are manu factured and tested in accord ance with their relevan t I EC stand ard (for
exampl e I EC 61 800 series).
1 2.2
Conductors
Conductors shou ld be of copper. Where aluminium cond uctors are used , th e cross-section al
area shall be at l east 1 6 mm 2 .
To ensure ad equ ate mech anical strength , the cross-sectional area of conductors sh ou ld not
be less th an as shown in Tabl e 5. H owever, cond uctors with small er cross-sectional areas or
other constructions than shown in Table 5 may be used in equipment provid ed ad equate
mech an ical strength is ach ieved by oth er means and proper fu nction ing is n ot impaired .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
N OTE
– 75 –
Cl assi fi cati on of con d u ctors i s gi ven i n Tabl e D. 4.
Table 5 – Minimum cross-sectional areas of copper conductors
Type of condu ctor, cable
Singl e core
Sol id
(class 1 ) or
stranded
(class 2)
Two core,
shielded
Power ci rcu i ts,
fi xed
1 ,0
1 ,5
0, 75
0, 75
0, 75
Power ci rcu i ts,
su bj ected to freq u en t
m ovem en ts
1 ,0
–
0, 75
0, 75
0, 75
Con trol ci rcu i ts
1 ,0
1 ,0
0, 2
0, 5
0, 2
–
–
–
–
0, 08
Power ci rcu i ts
(con n ecti on s n ot
m oved )
0, 75
0, 75
0, 75
0, 75
0, 75
Con trol ci rcu i ts
0, 2
0, 2
0, 2
0, 2
0, 2
–
–
–
–
0, 08
Location
Wi ri n g
ou tsi d e
(protecti n g )
en cl osu res
Appl icati on
Data com m u n i cati on
Wi ri n g i n si d e
en cl osu res a )
Data com mu n i cati on
N OTE
a)
M ul ti core
Flexible
Class 5 or 6
Two core
Three or
not shielded more cores,
shi elded or
not
Al l cross-secti on s i n mm 2 .
Except speci al req u i rem en ts of i n d i vi d u al stan d ard s, see al so 1 2. 1 .
Class 1 and class 2 cond uctors are primaril y in ten ded for use between rigid , non-movin g parts
wh ere vibration is n ot consid ered to be l ikely to cause d amage.
Al l cond uctors that are su bject to freq uen t movemen t (for example one movemen t per hour of
mach in e operation) shou ld have flexible strand ing of cl ass 5 or cl ass 6.
1 2.3
Insulation
Wh ere the insulation of conductors and cables can constitute hazard s d ue for example to the
propagation of a fire or th e emission of toxic or corrosive fu mes, guid ance from th e cabl e
su pplier sh all be sough t. I t is importan t to give special atten tion to the in tegrity of a circu it
having a safety-related function .


The insul ation of cabl es and cond uctors used , sh all be suitable for a test vol tage:
–
–
n ot less than 2 000 V AC for a duration of 5 min for operation at vol tages h igh er than
50 V AC or 1 20 V DC, or
n ot less than 500 V AC for a duration of 5 min for PELV circu its (see I EC 60364-4-41 ,
class I I I equipmen t).
The mechan ical strength and th ickness of the insu lation sh al l be such th at the insu lation
cannot be damaged in operation or d u ring laying, especiall y for cables pul l ed in to d ucts.
1 2.4
Current-carrying capacity in normal service
The curren t-carrying capacity depend s on several factors, for exampl e insulation material ,
number of conductors in a cable, d esign (sheath), methods of instal lation , grouping and
ambien t temperature.
N OTE 1 Detai l ed i n form ati on an d fu rth er g u i d an ce can be fou n d i n I EC 60364-5-52, i n som e n ati on al stan d ard s or
g i ven by th e man u factu rer.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 76 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
One typical exampl e of th e current-carrying capacities for PVC insulated wiring between
encl osures and in d ividu al items of equ ipmen t und er stead y-state cond itions is given in
Table 6.
N OTE 2 For speci fi c appl i cati on s wh ere th e correct cabl e d i m en si on i n g can d epen d on th e rel ati on sh i p between
th e peri od of th e d u ty cycl e an d th e th erm al ti m e con stan t of th e cabl e (for exam pl e starti n g ag ai n st h ig h -i n erti a
l oad , i n termi tten t d u ty), th e cabl e m an u factu rer can provi d e i n form ati on .
Table 6 – Examples of current-carrying capacity ( Iz ) of PVC insulated copper
conductors or cables under steady-state conditions in an ambient air temperature
of + 40 °C for different methods of installation
Install ation method (see D.2.2)
B1
Cross-sectional
area
B2
C
Cu rrent-carrying capacity
mm2
Iz
E
for three phase ci rcu its
A
0, 75
8, 6
8, 5
9, 8
1 0, 4
1 ,0
1 0, 3
1 0, 1
1 1 ,7
1 2, 4
1 ,5
1 3, 5
1 3, 1
1 5, 2
1 6, 1
2, 5
1 8, 3
1 7, 4
21
22
4
24
23
28
30
6
31
30
36
37
10
44
40
50
52
16
59
54
66
70
25
77
70
84
88
35
96
86
1 04
110
50
117
1 03
1 25
1 33
70
1 49
1 30
1 60
1 71
95
1 80
1 56
1 94
2 07
1 20
2 08
1 79
225
2 40
Control circu it pairs
N OTE 1
0, 2 0
4, 5
4, 3
4, 4
4, 4
0, 5
7, 9
7, 5
7, 5
7, 8
0, 75
9, 5
9, 0
9, 5
10
Th e val u es of th e cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ty of Tabl e 6 are based on :
–
on e symm etri cal th ree-ph ase ci rcu i t for cross-secti on al areas 0, 75 mm 2 an d g reater;
–
on e con trol ci rcu i t pai r for cross-secti on al areas between 0, 2 m m 2 an d 0, 75 m m 2 .
Wh ere m ore l oad ed cabl es/pai rs are i n stal l ed , d erati n g factors for th e val u es of Tabl e 6 can be fou n d i n
Tabl es D. 2 or D. 3.
N OTE 2 For am bi en t tem peratu res oth er th an 40 ° C, correcti on factors for cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ti es are
provi d ed i n Tabl e D. 1 .
N OTE 3 Th ese val u es are n ot appl i cabl e to fl exi bl e cabl es wou n d on d ru ms (see 1 2. 6. 3).
N OTE 4 Cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ti es of oth er cabl es are provi d ed i n I EC 60364-5-52.
1 2.5
Conductor and cable voltage drop
The vol tage d rop from th e poin t of supply to the load in an y power circu it cable shall not
exceed 5 % of the n ominal voltage und er normal operating cond itions. I n ord er to con form to
th is req uiremen t, it can be necessary to use cond uctors having a larger cross-sectional area
th an th at d erived from Table 6.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 77 –
I n con trol circuits, the vol tage drop shal l not red uce th e voltage at any d evice below th e
man u facturer’s specification for that d evice, taking into account inrush currents.
See also 4. 3.
The vol tage drop in componen ts, for example overcurren t protective devices and switch ing
d evices, shou ld be consid ered .
1 2.6
1 2.6.1
Flexible cables
General
Fl exible cables shall have Class 5 or Class 6 cond uctors.
N OTE 1 Cl ass 6 con d u ctors h ave sm al l er d i am eter stran d s an d are m ore fl exi bl e th an Cl ass 5 con d u ctors (see
Tabl e D. 4).
Cabl es that are subjected to severe du ties sh all be of ad eq uate construction to protect
against:
–
–
–
abrasion d ue to mechanical hand ling and d ragging across rough surfaces;
kinking d ue to operation withou t gu id es;
stress resul ting from guid e rol lers and forced guid in g, being wound and re-wou nd on cable
d rums.
N OTE 2 Cabl es for su ch con d i ti on s are speci fi ed i n some n ati on al stan d ard s.
N OTE 3 Th e operati on al l i fe of th e cabl e wi l l be red u ced wh ere u n favou rabl e operati n g con d i ti on s su ch as h i g h
ten si l e stress, sm al l rad ii , ben d i n g i n to an oth er pl an e an d /or wh ere freq u en t d u ty cycl es coi n ci d e.
1 2.6.2
Mechanical rating
The cabl e hand ling system of th e machine sh all be so d esign ed to keep th e tensile stress of
the con d uctors as low as is practicable d urin g machine operations. Where copper con d uctors
are used , the tensil e stress applied to th e con ductors shal l not exceed 1 5 N /mm 2 of the
copper cross-sectional area. Where the demand s of the application exceed the tensile stress
l imit of 1 5 N /mm 2 , cables with special construction features sh ou ld be used an d the allowed
maximal tensile stress sh ould be agreed with th e cabl e manufacturer.
The maximum stress applied to the cond uctors of flexible cabl es with material other th an
copper shal l be within the cable manu facturer’s specification .
N OTE
Th e fol l owi n g con d i ti on s affect th e ten si l e stress on th e con d u ctors:
–
accel erati on forces;
–
speed of m oti on ;
–
d ead (h an g i n g ) wei g h t of th e cabl es;
–
m eth od of g u i d i n g ;
–
d esi g n of cabl e d ru m system .
1 2.6.3
Cu rrent-carrying capacity of cables wound on drums
Cabl es to be woun d on d rums shall be selected with cond uctors havin g a cross-section al area
such that, wh en fu ll y wou nd on the d rum and carryin g the normal service load , th e maximu m
allowable con ductor temperature is not exceed ed .
For cables of circular cross-sectional area instal led on d rums, the maximum current-carrying
capacity in free air sh ould be d erated in accord ance with Table 7
N OTE Th e cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ty of cabl es i n free ai r can be fou n d i n m an u factu rers’ speci fi cati on s or i n
rel evan t n ati on al stan d ard s.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 78 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Table 7 – Derating factors for cables wound on drums
Drum type
Any number
Cyl i n d ri cal ven ti l ated
Number of layers of cable
1
2
3
4
–
0, 85
0, 65
0, 45
0, 35
Rad i al ven ti l ated
0, 85
–
–
–
–
Rad i al n on -ven ti l ated
0, 75
–
–
–
–
I t i s recom m en d ed th at th e u se of d erati n g factors be d i scu ssed wi th th e cabl e an d th e cabl e d ru m
m an u factu rers. Th i s may resu l t i n oth er factors bei n g u sed .
N OTE 1 A rad i al type d ru m i s on e wh ere spi ral l ayers of cabl e are accom m od ated between cl osel y spaced
fl an g es; i f fi tted wi th sol i d fl an g es, th e d ru m i s d escri bed as n on -ven ti l ated an d i f th e fl an g es h ave su i tabl e
apertu res, as ven ti l ated .
N OTE 2 A ven ti l ated cyl i n d er d ru m i s on e wh ere th e l ayers of cabl e are accom m od ated between wi d el y spaced
fl an g es an d th e d ru m an d en d fl an g es h ave ven ti l ati n g apertu res.
1 2.7 Conductor wires, conductor bars and slip-ring assemblies
1 2.7.1 Basic protection
Conductor wires, con ductor bars an d slip-rin g assembl ies sh al l be installed or enclosed in
such a way that, d uring n ormal access to the mach in e, basic protection is achieved by the
application of one of the fol lowin g protective measu res:
–
–
protection by partial insu lation of live parts, or wh ere this is n ot practicable;
protection by encl osures or barriers of at l east I P2X or I PXXB.
H orizon tal top surfaces of barriers or enclosures th at are read il y accessible sh all provide a
d egree of protection of at least I P4X or I PXXD.
Wh ere the requ ired d egree of protection is not ach ieved , protection by placin g live parts out of
reach in combination with emergency switching off in accordance with 9. 2. 3. 4. 3 sh al l be
applied .
Cond uctor wires and cond uctor bars shal l be so pl aced and /or protected as to:
–
–
preven t contact, especiall y for unprotected con d uctor wires and cond uctor bars, with
cond uctive items such as the cord s of pu ll-cord switches, strain-relief devices and d rive
chains;
preven t d amage from a swingin g l oad .
See also 6. 2. 6.
1 2.7.2 Protective conductors
Wh ere cond uctor wires, con ductor bars an d sl ip-ring assemblies are instal led as part of the
protective bond ing circuit, th ey shall not carry cu rren t in normal operation . Th erefore, th e
protective cond uctor (PE) and the neu tral cond uctor (N ) shall each use a separate con d uctor
wire, cond uctor bar or sl ip-ring.
The con tinuity of protective con ductors using slid ing con tacts sh al l be ensured by taking
appropriate measures (for example, d uplication of th e current collector, continu ity mon itoring).
1 2.7.3 Protective conductor current collectors
Protective conductor cu rren t col lectors shall have a sh ape or construction so th at they are n ot
in terchangeable with the other curren t coll ectors. Such curren t collectors shal l be of the
sliding con tact type.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 79 –
1 2.7.4 Removable current collectors with a disconnector function
Removable cu rren t collectors h aving a d iscon nector fu nction shal l be so d esigned th at the
protective conductor circu it is in terru pted onl y after th e live con d uctors have been
d isconnected , and th e continu ity of th e protective con ductor circuit is re-establ ish ed before
any l ive cond uctor is reconnected (see also 8. 2. 3).
1 2.7.5 Clearances in air
Clearances between the respective conductors, and between ad jacen t systems, of cond uctor
wires, con d uctor bars, slip-ring assemblies and th eir current col lectors shall be suitable for at
l east a rated impu lse vol tage of an overvoltage category I I I in accord ance with I EC 60664-1 .
1 2.7.6 Creepage distances
Creepage d istances between th e respective cond uctors, between ad jacen t systems of
cond uctor wires, conductor bars and slip-ring assembl ies, and th eir curren t col lectors shal l be
suitable for operation in the intend ed en vironmen t, for example open air, insid e bu ild ings,
protected by encl osures.
I n abnormall y d usty, moist or corrosive en vironmen ts, the fol lowin g creepage d istance
requ iremen ts appl y:
–
–
u nprotected con ductor wires, con ductor bars, and sl ip-ring assemblies shall be equ ipped
with insu lators with a minimum creepage d istance of 60 mm;
encl osed cond uctor wires, insu lated mul tipole cond uctor bars and insu lated ind ivid u al
cond uctor bars shall have a minimum creepage d istance of 30 mm.
The manufacturer's recommend ations shal l be fol lowed regard ing special measu res to
preven t a grad ual red uction in the insu lation valu es due to u n favourable ambien t cond itions
(for example d eposits of cond uctive d ust, chemical attack).
1 2.7.7 Conductor system sectioning
Wh ere conductor wires or cond uctor bars are arran ged so th at they can be divid ed in to
isolated sections, su itabl e d esign measures sh all be employed to preven t the energization of
adj acen t sections by the cu rrent collectors themselves.
1 2.7.8 Construction and installation of conductor wire, conductor bar systems and
slip-ring assemblies
Cond uctor wires, cond uctor bars an d slip-ring assemblies in power circu its shall be grouped
separatel y from those in con trol circuits.
Conductor wires, cond uctor bars and slip-rin g assemblies, in clud ing their curren t collectors,
sh al l be capabl e of withstand ing, with ou t d amage, the mechanical forces and th ermal effects
of short-circu it curren ts.
Removable covers for conductor wire and conductor bar systems laid und erground or
u nderfloor sh al l be so designed th at they cannot be open ed by one person withou t th e aid of a
tool .
Where cond uctor bars are instal led in a common metal enclosu re, the ind ivid u al sections of
the enclosure shall be bond ed togeth er and conn ected to the protective bond in g circu it. M etal
covers of cond uctor bars laid u nd ergrou nd or u nderfloor sh all also be bond ed together and
connected to the protective bond in g circu it.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 80 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
The protective bon ding circu it shall includ e the covers or cover pl ates of metal enclosu res or
u nd erfl oor ducts. Where metal hinges form a part of the protective bond ing circuit, their
continu ity shall be verified (see Clause 1 8).
Cond uctor bar d ucts th at can be subject to accu mu lation of liq uid such as oil or water shal l
h ave d rainage facilities.
1 3 Wiring practices
1 3.1
1 3.1 .1
Connections and routing
General requirements
All connections, especial ly those of the protective bond ing circu it, shall be secured against
accid en tal loosen ing.
The means of con nection shal l be su itabl e for th e cross-section al areas and nature of th e
conductors being terminated .
The con nection of two or more cond uctors to one terminal is permitted only in th ose cases
wh ere the terminal is d esign ed for that pu rpose. H owever, only one protective cond uctor sh all
be con nected to on e terminal con necting poin t.
Sold ered con nections shal l onl y be permitted where terminals are provid ed that are suitable
for sol d erin g.
Terminals on terminal blocks shal l be plain ly marked or labell ed to correspond with the
identification used in th e d iagrams.
N OTE
I EC 61 666 provi d es ru l es th at can be u sed for th e d esi g n ati on of term i n al s wi th i n th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t.
Wh ere an incorrect electrical conn ection (for example, arising from repl acemen t of d evices) is
iden tified as a sou rce of risk th at n eed s to be red uced and it is n ot practicable to red uce th e
possibility of incorrect connection by d esign measures, the cond uctors and /or terminations
sh al l be id entified .
The instal lation of flexible condu its an d cables shal l be such th at l iqu id s sh all drain away from
th e fittin gs.
M eans of retaining con ductor stran ds shal l be provid ed when termin ating cond uctors at
d evices or terminals that are not equipped with this facil ity. Sold er shal l n ot be used for that
purpose.
Sh ield ed con ductors shal l be so terminated as to prevent fraying of strands an d to permit
easy d isconn ection .
I d en tification tags sh all be legible, permanen t, and appropriate for the physical en viron ment.
Terminal blocks shall be moun ted and wired so th at the wiring d oes n ot cross over the
terminals.
1 3.1 .2 Conductor and cable runs
Cond uctors and cables shall be run from terminal to terminal withou t spl ices or join ts.
Connections usin g plug/socket combinations with su itable protection against accid en tal
d isconnection are not consid ered to be splices or join ts for the purpose of 1 3. 1 . 2.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 81 –
Exception : Where it is impracticable to provide terminals in a junction box (for example on
mobile mach in es, on machines h aving long flexible cables; cable conn ections exceed ing a
len gth wh ich is n ot practical to be su pplied by th e cabl e manufacturer on one cable drum),
spl ices or j oin ts may be used .
Wh ere it is necessary to connect and d iscon nect cabl es and cable assembl ies, sufficien t extra
len gth shal l be provid ed for that purpose.
The termin ations of cables shall be ad equately supported to preven t mechan ical stresses at
th e terminations of th e cond uctors.
Wh erever practicabl e, the protective cond uctor sh al l be placed cl ose to th e associated live
cond uctors in ord er to d ecrease the imped ance of the loop.
1 3.1 .3 Conductors of different circuits
Cond uctors of differen t circu its may be laid side by side, may occupy the same d uct (for
example cond uit, cable trunking system), or may be in the same mul ticon d uctor cabl e or in the
same plu g/socket combin ation provid ed that the arran gement does not impair the proper
fu nction ing of the respective circu its and :
•
wh ere th ose circu its operate at d ifferen t voltages, the cond uctors are separated by
su itabl e barriers or;
•
th e cond uctors are insulated for the h ighest vol tage to which an y of the cond uctors can be
su bjected , for example l in e to l ine voltage for un earthed systems and phase to earth
vol tage for earthed systems.
1 3.1 .4 AC circuits – Electromagnetic effects (prevention of eddy currents)
Cond uctors of AC circu its installed in ferromagnetic enclosures sh all be arranged so th at al l
conductors of each circu it, includ ing the protective cond uctor of each circuit, are con tained in
th e same enclosu re. Where such con d uctors en ter a ferrous enclosure, th ey sh all be arranged
such that the cond uctors are n ot in divid ual ly surround ed by ferromagnetic material.
Single-core cables armou red with steel wire or steel tape should not be used for AC circu its.
N OTE 1 Th e steel wi re or steel tape arm ou r of a si n g l e-core cabl e i s regard ed as a ferrom ag n etic en cl osu re. For
si n g l e-core wi re arm ou red cabl es, th e u se of al u m i n i u m arm ou r i s recom m en d ed .
N OTE 2 Deri ved from I EC 60364-5-52.
1 3.1 .5 Connection between pick-up and pick-up converter of an inductive power
supply system
The cable between the pick-up and th e pick-up con verter shal l be:
–
–
as short as practicable;
adeq uatel y protected against mechan ical d amage.
N OTE Th e ou tpu t of th e pi ck-u p can be a cu rren t sou rce, th erefore d am ag e to th e cabl e can resu l t i n a h i gh
vol tag e h azard .
1 3.2 Identification of conductors
1 3.2.1 General requirements
Each cond uctor sh all be id entifiable at each termination in accordance with the techn ical
d ocumen tation.
I t is recommend ed (for example to facil itate main tenance) that cond uctors be id en tified by
n umber, alph anu meric, colour (eith er sol id or with one or more stripes), or a combin ation of
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 82 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
colour and n umbers or alphan umeric. Wh en numbers are used , they shal l be Arabic; letters
sh al l be Roman (either u pper or lower case).
N OTE 1 An n ex B can be u sed for ag reem en t between su ppl i er an d u ser regard i n g a preferred m eth od of
i d en ti fi cati on .
N OTE 2 I EC 62491 provi d es ru l es an d g u i d el i n es for th e l abel l i n g of cabl es an d cores/con d u ctors u sed i n
i n d u stri al i n stal l ati on s, eq u i pmen t an d prod u cts.
1 3.2.2
Identification of the protective conductor / protective bonding conductor
The protective cond uctor / protective bon d ing conductor shal l be read ily d istinguishable from
other con d uctors by shape, location , marking, or colour. Wh en id en tification is by col our
alone, th e bicolour combination GREEN -AN D-YELLOW shal l be used throu ghou t the length of
the cond uctor. This col our id en tification is strictl y reserved for protective
cond uctors/protective bond ing cond uctors.
For insul ated con d uctors, the bicol ou r combination GREEN -AN D-YELLOW shall be such that
on any 1 5 mm l en gth , one of the colou rs covers at l east 30 % and n ot more th an 70 % of th e
su rface of the cond uctor, th e oth er colou r covering the remaind er of th e surface.
Wh ere the protective con ductor(s) can be easil y id en tified by its shape, position , or
construction (for example a braid ed cond uctor, un insulated strand ed cond uctor), or where th e
insu lated con ductor is not read il y accessible or is part of a mul ticore cabl e, colour cod in g
throu ghou t its length is n ot necessary. H owever, where the con d uctor is not cl early visible
throu ghou t its length , th e end s or accessible locations shal l be clearly iden tified by th e
graphical symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9: 2006-08 (see Figure 1 6) or with the letters PE or by the
bicolour combination GREEN -AN D-YELLOW.
Figure 1 6 – Symbol IEC 6041 7-501 9
Exception : Protective bond ing cond uctors may be marked with the letters PB an d /or the
symbol I EC 6041 7-5021 (2002-1 0) (see Figure 1 7).
Figure 1 7 – Symbol IEC 6041 7-5021
1 3.2.3
Identification of the neutral conductor
Wh ere a circuit inclu des a n eu tral cond uctor th at is iden tified by colou r alone, the colour used
for th is cond uctor shall be BLU E. I n ord er to avoid con fusion with oth er colou rs, it is
recommended th at an unsaturated blu e be used , cal l ed here “l igh t blue” (see 6. 2. 2 of
I EC 60445: 201 0). Where th e selected colour is th e sole id entification of th e neutral cond uctor,
that colou r sh all n ot be used for id en tifying an y other conductor where con fusion is possible.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 83 –
Wh ere id en tification by colour is used , bare con d uctors used as neu tral cond uctors shall be
eith er coloured by a stripe, 1 5 mm to 1 00 mm wide in each compartment or unit and at each
accessible location , or coloured throughou t their len gth.
1 3.2.4
I d e n t i fi c a t i o n
by col ou r
Wh ere colou r-cod in g is u sed for id en tification of cond uctors (other th an the protective
conductor (see 1 3. 2. 2) an d the neu tral conductor (see 1 3. 2. 3)), the fol lowing colours may be
used :
BLACK, BROWN , RED, ORAN GE, YELLOW, GREEN , BLU E (includ ing LI GH T BLU E),
VI OLET, GREY, WH I TE, PI N K, TU RQU OI SE.
N OTE
Th i s l i st of col ou rs i s d eri ved from I EC 60757.
I t is recommended that, wh ere col our is used for iden tification , the colour be used through out
th e l ength of th e con d uctor either by the colou r of the insu lation or by colour markers at
regular intervals and at th e en d s or accessible location .
For safety reasons, the colour GREEN or th e colou r YELLOW shou ld not be used wh ere there
is a possibility of con fusion with the bicolour combination GREEN -AN D-YELLOW (see 1 3. 2. 2).
Colour id en tification usin g combin ations of those colou rs listed above may be used provid ed
th ere can be n o con fusion and that GREEN or YELLOW is n ot used except in th e bicolour
combin ation GREEN -AN D-YELLOW.
Wh ere colour-cod in g is used for iden tification of conductors, it is recommend ed that they be
colour-cod ed as foll ows:
–
–
–
–
BLACK:
RED:
BLU E:
ORAN GE:
AC and DC power circu its;
AC control circu its;
DC con trol circu its;
excepted circu its in accord ance with 5. 3. 5.
Exceptions to the above are permitted where insul ation is n ot available in th e colours
recommended (for example in mu lticond uctor cables).
1 3. 3
W i ri n g i n s i d e e n c l o s u re s
Conductors insid e enclosu res shal l be supported where n ecessary to keep th em in place.
N on-metallic d ucts shall be permitted onl y when th ey are mad e with a fl ame-retard an t
insu latin g material (see th e I EC 60332 series).
I t is recommen ded that electrical equ ipment mou nted insid e enclosures be d esign ed and
constructed in such a way as to permit mod ification of the wirin g from the front of the
encl osure (see also 1 1 . 2. 1 ). Where th at is not practicable and control d evices are con nected
from th e rear of the enclosure, access d oors or swingou t panels shall be provid ed .
Connections to d evices mou n ted on d oors or to other movable parts shal l be mad e using
fl exible cond uctors in accord ance with 1 2. 2 and 1 2. 6 to al low for the frequ en t movemen t of
th e part. The con ductors shall be anch ored to the fixed part and to the movabl e part
ind epend en tl y of the electrical connection (see also 8. 2. 3 and 1 1 . 2. 1 ).
Cond uctors and cabl es th at d o not run in ducts shall be ad equately supported .
Terminal blocks or plug/socket combinations sh al l be used for con trol wirin g that extend s
beyon d the enclosure. For plug/socket combinations, see also 1 3. 4. 5 an d 1 3. 4. 6.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 84 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Power cabl es and cables of measurin g circu its may be directl y connected to the terminals of
th e d evices for wh ich the connections were in tend ed .
1 3.4
1 3.4.1
Wiring outside enclosures
General requirements
The means of in trod uction of cabl es or d ucts with their ind ivid ual gl ands, bushin gs, etc. , in to
an enclosure shall ensure that th e d egree of protection is not reduced (see 1 1 . 3).
Conductors of a circuit sh al l not be d istribu ted over d ifferen t mul ti-core cables, condu its, cable
d ucting systems or cable tru nking systems. This is n ot requ ired where a nu mber of mu l ti-core
cabl es, forming on e circu it, are installed in paral lel . Wh ere mu lti -core cabl es are installed in
paral lel , each cable sh al l con tain one cond uctor of each phase and the n eu tral if an y.
1 3.4.2
External ducts
Cond uctors and their connections external to the electrical equ ipment enclosure(s) shal l be
encl osed in suitable d ucts (i. e. condu it or cabl e trunking systems) as described in 1 3. 5 except
for su itably protected cables that may be instal led withou t d ucts and with or withou t the use of
cabl e trays or cable support means. Where devices such as position switches or proximity
switches are supplied with a d ed icated cable, their cable need not be enclosed in a d uct when
th e cable is su itabl e for th e purpose, su fficien tly short, and so located or protected, that the
risk of d amage is min imized .
Fittings used with d ucts or cables shall be suitable for the ph ysical en vironmen t.
Flexible cond uit or fl exibl e mu l ticon ductor cable sh al l be used wh ere it is n ecessary to employ
fl exible con nections to pendan t push-bu tton stations. Th e weigh t of th e pendan t stations shall
be supported by means other th an th e flexible cond u it or the flexible mu l ticond uctor cable,
except wh ere the cond u it or cable is specifical ly d esigned for th at purpose.
1 3.4.3
Connection to moving elements of the machine
The d esign of conn ections to moving parts shall take in to account the foreseeable frequency
of movement and sh all be mad e using cond uctors in accord ance with 1 2. 2 and 1 2. 6. Fl exibl e
cabl e an d flexible condu it sh all be so instal led as to avoid excessive flexin g and straining,
particu larl y at the fittings.
Cabl es subject to movemen t shall be supported in such a way that there is no mechan ical
strain on the connection points nor any sh arp flexing. Wh en th is is achieved by the provision
of a loop, it sh all have su fficien t length to provid e for a ben d ing rad ius of th e cabl e as
specified by th e cable manu facturer or if no such specification is given , at l east 1 0 times the
d iameter of th e cable.
Flexible cables of mach in es sh al l be so instal led or protected as to min imize the possibil ity of
extern al d amage d u e to factors that includ e the fol lowin g cabl e use or poten tial abuse:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
being run over by the mach ine itself;
being run over by vehicles or other machines;
coming in to con tact with th e mach ine structure during movemen ts;
runnin g in an d ou t of cable baskets, or on or off cable d rums;
accel eration forces an d wind forces on festoon systems or suspen ded cabl es;
excessive rubbing by cable col lector;
exposure to excessive rad iated h eat.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 85 –
The cable sh eath shal l be resistan t to the normal wear that can be expected from movemen t
and to the effects of en vironmen tal contaminan ts (for example oil , water, cool ants, d ust).
Wh ere cables subject to movemen t are close to movin g parts, precau tions sh al l be taken to
main tain a space of at l east 25 mm between th e moving parts and the cables. Where that
d istance is n ot practicable, fixed barriers shal l be provid ed between the cables and th e
moving parts.
The cable hand ling system shall be so d esigned that l ateral cabl e angles d o not exceed 5 ° ,
avoiding torsion in the cable when :
–
–
being woun d on an d off cable d rums; and
approach in g and leaving cable gu id ance d evices.
M easures sh all be taken to ensure th at at l east two turns of fl exible cables always remain on
a d ru m.
Devices serving to gu id e an d carry a flexible cable shall be so d esigned that th e inner
bend in g rad ius at all poin ts wh ere the cabl e is ben t is not less than the values given in
Table 8, un less oth erwise agreed with the cable manu facturer, taking in to accou n t the
permissible tension and th e expected fatigue life.
Table 8 – Minimum permitted bending radii for the forced guiding
of flexible cables
Application
Cable diameter or thickness of flat cable ( d)
mm
d≤8
8 < d ≤ 20
d > 20
Cabl e d ru ms
6d
6d
8d
G u i d e rol l ers
6d
8d
8d
Festoon system s
6d
6d
8d
Al l oth ers
6d
6d
8d
The straight section between two bend s shall be at l east 20 times the d iameter of the cable.
Wh ere flexible cond uit is ad jacen t to moving parts, the construction an d supportin g means
sh al l prevent d amage to th e flexible condu it u nder al l con d itions of operation.
Flexible cond uit shall not be used for conn ections subject to rapid or frequen t movemen ts
except wh en specificall y d esigned for that purpose.
1 3.4.4 Interconnection of devices on the machine
Wh ere several machine-mou n ted devices (for exampl e position sensors, push -bu ttons) are
connected in series or in parallel , it is recommend ed that th e conn ections between those
d evices be mad e through terminals forming in termed iate test poin ts. Such terminals shal l be
conveniently placed , adeq uatel y protected , and sh own on the rel evan t d iagrams.
1 3.4.5 Plug/socket combinations
Componen ts or d evices insid e an enclosure, terminated by fixed plu g/socket combinations (no
fl exible cable), or componen ts connected to a bus system by a pl ug/socket combination , are
n ot consid ered to be plug/socket combinations for the purpose of th is 1 3. 4. 5.
After instal lation in accord ance with item a) below, plu g/socket combin ations shal l be of such
a type as to preven t un inten tional con tact with l ive parts at any time, includ in g d u ring insertion
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 86 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
or removal of th e con nectors. Th e degree of protection shall be at least I P2X or I PXXB. PELV
circu its are excepted from this req uiremen t.
Wh ere the pl ug/socket con tains a contact for the protective bond ing circuit, it shal l have a first
make last break con tact (see also 8. 2. 4).
Pl ug/socket combin ations in ten d ed to be connected or d isconnected during load con ditions
sh al l have su fficien t l oad -breaking capacity. Wh ere the plug/socket combination is rated at
30 A, or greater, it shal l be in terlocked with a switch ing d evice so that th e connection and
d isconnection is possible only when th e switching d evice is in the OFF position .
Pl ug/socket combin ations that are rated at more than 1 6 A shal l h ave a retaining means to
preven t un intended or accid en tal d isconnection .
Wh ere an un in tend ed or accid ental d iscon nection of plug/socket combin ations can cause a
h azard ous situation , they sh al l h ave a retainin g means.
The instal lation of plug/socket combinations shal l fu lfil th e following req uiremen ts as
applicable:
a) The component which remains l ive after d isconnection sh al l have a d egree of protection of
at least I P2X or I PXXB, taking in to accou nt th e requ ired cl earance and creepage
d istances. PELV circuits are excepted from this requ iremen t.
b) M etallic housin gs of plug/socket combin ations shall be connected to the protective
bond in g circuit.
c) Pl ug/socket combin ations in tend ed to carry power loads bu t n ot to be d isconnected d u ring
l oad cond itions shall have a retain in g means to preven t u nin tend ed or accid ental
d isconnection and sh all be clearl y marked th at th ey are n ot in tend ed to be discon nected
u nd er l oad .
d ) Wh ere more than one plug/socket combination is provid ed in the same el ectrical
equ ipmen t, the associated combinations shal l be cl earl y id en tifiable. I t is recommended
th at mechanical cod in g be used to preven t incorrect insertion.
e) Pl ug/socket combin ations used in con trol circuits sh all ful fil the applicable req uiremen ts of
I EC 61 984.
Exception : I n plug/socket combinations in accord ance with I EC 60309-1 , on l y those con tacts
sh all be used for con trol circuits which are in tend ed for those pu rposes. This exception d oes
not apply to control circuits using high freq uency signals superimposed on th e power circu its.
1 3.4.6 Dismantling for shipment
Wh ere it is necessary th at wiring be disconn ected for shipment, terminals or plug/socket
combin ations shal l be provid ed at th e section al poin ts. Such terminals sh all be suitably
enclosed and plu g/socket combinations shall be protected from the ph ysical environment
d uring transportation and storage.
1 3.4.7 Additional conductors
Consid eration sh ould be given to provid in g ad d itional cond uctors for main tenance or repair.
Wh en spare cond uctors are provided , th ey sh all be connected to spare terminals or isolated in
such a mann er as to preven t con tact with live parts.
1 3.5 Ducts, connection boxes and other boxes
1 3.5.1 General requirements
Ducts shall provid e a d egree of protection (see I EC 60529) su itable for the appl ication.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 87 –
All sharp ed ges, flash , burrs, rou gh surfaces, or thread s with which th e insu lation of the
conductors can come in con tact sh all be removed from d ucts and fittings. Wh ere necessary,
ad d itional protection consisting of a flame-retard an t, oil-resistan t insu lating material sh all be
provid ed to protect conductor insu lation .
Drain holes of 6 mm d iameter are permitted in cabl e trunking systems, connection boxes, and
other boxes used for wiring pu rposes th at can be subj ect to accu mu lations of oil or moisture.
I n ord er to preven t confusion of condu its with oil , air, or water piping, it is recommended th at
th e con du its be either physicall y separated or suitably id en tified .
Ducts and cabl e trays shal l be rigid ly supported and position ed at a sufficient distance from
moving parts an d in such a manner so as to minimize the possibil ity of damage or wear.
I n areas where hu man passage is requ ired , the d ucts an d cable trays shall be moun ted at
least 2 m above the working surface.
Cabl e trays th at are partiall y covered shou ld n ot be consid ered to be d ucts or cable tru nking
systems (see 1 3. 5. 6), an d the cables used sh al l be of a type su itabl e for install ation on open
cabl e trays.
I t is recommended that the dimensions and arran gemen t of d ucts be such as to facil itate the
insertion of th e cond uctors and cables.
1 3.5.2
Rigid metal conduit and fittings
Rigid metal cond uit and fittings sh all be of gal vanized steel or of a corrosion -resistant material
su itabl e for the con d itions.
Where galvanic action is possible between dissimilar metals metal

these combinations shall not be used.

Condu its shal l be securel y h el d in place an d supported at each end .
Fittings sh all be compatible with the condu it an d appropriate for th e application . Fittings
sh ou ld be thread ed u nless structural d ifficul ties prevent assembl y. Where thread less fittings
are used , the cond uit shal l be securel y fastened to the equ ipmen t.
Condu it bends shall be mad e in such a manner th at the cond uit shall n ot be d amaged and the
in ternal d iameter of the condu it sh al l n ot be effectivel y reduced .
1 3.5.3
Flexible metal condu it and fittings
A flexibl e metal cond uit sh al l consist of a fl exibl e metal tu bing or woven wire armour. I t shall
be su itable for the expected physical environ men t.
Fittings shall be compatible with the condu it and appropriate for the appl ication .
1 3.5.4
Flexible non-metallic conduit and fittings
Fl exibl e non -metal lic condu it sh al l be resistan t to kinking and sh all have ph ysical
ch aracteristics similar to th ose of the sheath of mu l ticon ductor cables.
The cond uit sh all be su itable for use in the expected ph ysical en viron men t.
Fittings shall be compatible with the cond uit and appropriate for the appl ication.
1 3.5.5
Cable trunking systems
Cabl e trunkin g systems external to enclosu res shall be rigid l y supported and cl ear of all
moving parts of the mach in e and of sources of con tamination.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 88 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Covers shall be shaped to overlap th e sid es; gaskets shall be permitted . Covers sh al l be
attached to cabl e trunkin g systems by su itable means. On horizon tal cabl e trunking systems,
th e cover shal l not be on th e bottom u nl ess specificall y design ed for such instal lation.
N OTE Req u i rem en ts for cabl e tru n ki n g an d d u cti n g systems for el ectri cal i n stal l ati on s are g i ven i n th e I EC 61 084
seri es.
Wh ere th e cabl e trunking system is furn ished in sections, the join ts between sections shall fit
tightly bu t need not be gasketed .
The on ly openings permitted sh all be those req uired for wiring or for d rain age. Cabl e trunkin g
systems shal l not h ave opened bu t un used knockou ts.
1 3.5.6
Machine compartments and cable trunking systems
The use of compartmen ts or cable tru nking systems with in the colu mn or base of a machine to
encl ose cond uctors is permitted provid ed the compartmen ts or cabl e trunking systems are
isolated from coolan t or oil reservoirs and are en tirel y enclosed . Conductors run in enclosed
compartments and cable tru nking systems shal l be so secured an d arran ged that they are n ot
su bj ect to d amage.
1 3.5.7
Connection boxes and other boxes
Connection boxes and other boxes used for wirin g pu rposes shal l be accessible for
main tenance. Those boxes shall provid e protection against th e ingress of solid bod ies and
l iqu id s, takin g into accoun t the external in fl uences und er wh ich th e machine is in tended to
operate (see 1 1 . 3).
Those boxes shal l not have opened but u nused kn ockou ts nor an y other open ings and shall
be so constructed as to exclu de materials such as d ust, fl yin gs, oil , an d cool an t.
1 3.5.8
Motor connection boxes
M otor connection boxes shall enclose onl y connections to the motor and motor-mou nted
d evices (for example brakes, temperatu re sensors, pl uggin g switch es, tachometer
generators).
1 4 Electric motors and associated equipment
1 4.1
General requirements
El ectric motors shoul d con form to the relevant parts of I EC 60034 series.
The protection requ iremen ts for motors and associated equ ipment are given in 7. 2 for
overcurrent protection , in 7. 3 for protection of motors against overheating, and in 7. 6 for
overspeed protection .
As man y con trollers do n ot switch off the supply to a motor wh en it is at rest, care sh al l be
taken to ensure compliance with the requ iremen ts of 5. 3, 5. 4, 5. 5, 7. 5, 7. 6 and 9. 4. M otor
con trol equ ipmen t shal l be located an d moun ted in accord ance with Clause 1 1 .
1 4.2
Motor enclosures
Enclosures for motors should be in accord ance with I EC 60034-5.
The d egree of protection sh all be d epend en t on th e application an d the physical en vironmen t
(see 4. 4). All motors sh al l be ad eq uately protected from mechanical d amage.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
1 4.3
– 89 –
Motor dimensions
As far as is practicable, the d imensions of motors shall con form to those given in the
I EC 60072 series.
1 4.4
Motor mounting and compartments
Each motor and its associated couplings, bel ts, pulleys, or ch ains, shall be so mou nted th at
th ey are ad equ ately protected and are easily accessible for inspection , maintenance,
adj ustmen t and alignmen t, l ubrication , and replacemen t. Th e motor moun ting arran gement
shal l be such that al l motor mou n tin g means can be removed and all terminal boxes are
accessible.
M otors shal l be so moun ted that proper cooling is ensured and the temperature rise remains
with in th e l imits of the insul ation class (see I EC 60034-1 ).
Wh ere practicable, motor compartments shoul d be clean and d ry, an d when requ ired , sh al l be
ven tilated d irectl y to the exterior of th e machine. The ven ts sh all be such that in gress of
swarf, dust, or water spray is at an acceptable level.
There shal l be no open ing between th e motor compartmen t and an y oth er compartmen t th at
d oes not meet the motor compartmen t req uiremen ts. Wh ere a condu it or pipe is run in to the
motor compartmen t from another compartmen t n ot meeting the motor compartment
requ iremen ts, an y clearance around th e cond u it or pipe shall be sealed .
1 4.5
Criteria for motor selection
The characteristics of motors and associated equ ipmen t shall be selected in accordance with
th e an ticipated service an d ph ysical environ men tal con d itions (see 4. 4). I n th is respect, th e
points that sh al l be consid ered incl ude:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
type of motor;
type of d u ty cycle (see I EC 60034-1 );
fixed speed or variabl e speed operation, (and th e consequen t variable in fl uence of the
ven tilation);
mech anical vibration ;
type of motor con trol ;
temperatu re rise and other effects of the frequency spectrum of the vol tage and /or curren t
feed ing the motor (particularl y when it is suppl ied from a con verter);
meth od of startin g and th e possibl e in flu ence of th e in rush curren t on th e operation of
other users of the same power supply, takin g also into accoun t possibl e special
consid erations stipul ated by the su ppl y au thority;
variation of coun ter-torqu e l oad with time an d speed ;
in fluence of l oad s with large inertia;
in fluence of constan t torq ue or constan t power operation ;
possibl e need of ind uctive reactors between motor an d con verter.
1 4.6
Protective devices for mechanical brakes
Operation of th e overl oad and overcu rren t protective d evices for mechan ical brake actuators
shal l in itiate the simu l taneous d e-energization (release) of the associated mach in e actu ators.
N OTE Associ ated m ach i n e actu ators are th ose associ ated wi th th e same m oti on , for exam pl e cabl e d ru m s an d
l on g -travel d rives.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 90 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
1 5 Socket-outlets and lighting
1 5.1
Socket-outlets for accessories
Wh ere th e mach in e or its associated eq uipmen t is provid ed with socket-ou tlets that are
in tended to be used for accessory eq uipment (for example hand-held power tools, test
equ ipmen t), th e foll owing apply:
–
–
–
–
–
–
th e socket-ou tl ets should con form to I EC 60309-1 . Where that is n ot practicable, th ey
sh ou ld be clearly marked with the vol tage an d curren t ratings;
th e con tin uity of the protective bon d in g circu it to th e socket-ou tlet shall be ensu red ;
al l un earthed cond uctors connected to the socket-ou tl et sh al l be protected against
overcurrent an d , when requ ired , against overl oad in accord ance with 7. 2 and 7. 3
separately from the protection of oth er circu its;
where th e power supply to the socket-ou tlet is not d isconn ected by th e suppl y d isconnecting d evice for the mach in e or the section of th e machine, the requ iremen ts of 5. 3. 5
apply;
wh ere fau l t protection is provid ed by au tomatic d iscon nection of suppl y, th e d isconn ection
time shal l be in accord ance with Table A. 1 for TN systems or Table A. 2 for TT systems;
circuits supplying socket-ou tl ets with a curren t rating n ot exceeding 20 A sh all be provid ed
with resid ual curren t protection (RCDs) with a rated operating current n ot exceed ing
30 mA.
1 5.2
1 5.2.1
Local lighting of the machine and of the equipment
General
The ON /OFF switch shal l not be incorporated in th e lamphold er or in th e flexible connecting
cord.
Stroboscopic effects from l igh ts shall be avoid ed by the selection of appropriate luminaires.
Wh ere fixed ligh ting is provided in an enclosure, electromagnetic compatibil ity shoul d be
taken in to accoun t usin g th e principles ou tlined in 4. 4. 2.
1 5.2.2
Supply
The nominal vol tage of th e local l ighting circu it sh al l not exceed 250 V between con d uctors. A
voltage n ot exceed in g 50 V between cond uctors is recommen d ed .
Lighting circuits sh all be supplied from one of the fol lowing sou rces (see al so 7. 2. 6):
–
–
–
–
–
a d ed icated isolating transformer connected to the load sid e of the suppl y d isconn ecting
d evice. Overcu rren t protection shall be provid ed in th e second ary circu it;
a ded icated isolating transformer connected to th e line side of the supply d isconnectin g
d evice. That source sh al l be permitted for main tenance l igh ting circu its in con trol
encl osures only. Overcu rrent protection shall be provid ed in the secondary circuit (see
also 5. 3. 5);
a circu it of th e electrical equ ipmen t of th e machin e for ligh ting, with d ed icated overcu rren t
protection ;
an isolating transformer conn ected to the l in e side of the su ppl y d isconnectin g device,
provid ed with a d edicated primary d isconn ecting means (see 5. 3. 5) and second ary
overcurren t protection , and mou n ted within the con trol encl osu re ad jacent to the su pply
d isconnecting d evice;
an external ly suppl ied ligh ting circu it (for exampl e factory lighting supply). Th is sh al l be
permitted in con trol encl osu res on ly, an d for the mach in e work ligh t(s) where their total
power rating is not more th an 3 kW;
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
–
– 91 –
power supply u nits, for DC su ppl y to LED light sources, fitted with isolatin g transformers
(for example, in accord ance with I EC 61 558-2-6).
Exception : wh ere fixed l igh ting is ou t of reach of operators d urin g n ormal operations, the
provisions of 1 5. 2. 2 do not appl y.
1 5.2.3
Protection
Local l igh ting circuits shal l be protected in accord ance with 7. 2. 6.
1 5.2.4
Fittings
Ad justable ligh ting fittings sh all be suitable for th e ph ysical environment.
The lamph old ers sh all be:
–
–
in accord ance with the relevant I EC stand ard ;
constructed with an insulating material protectin g the l amp cap so as to preven t
u nin ten tional con tact.
Reflectors shal l be supported by a bracket an d not by the lamphol der.
Exception : wh ere fixed l igh ting is ou t of reach of operators d urin g n ormal operation , the
provisions of 1 5. 2. 4 do not appl y.
1 6 Marking, warning signs and reference designations
1 6.1
General

Warn ing signs, nameplates, markings, labels and id en tification plates sh all be of sufficient
d urabil ity to withstand the ph ysical en vironmen t in vol ved .
The markings shall be suff ciently
durable to remain legible for the foreseen lifetime of the machine.
1 6.2
1 6.2.1

Warning signs
Electric shock hazard
Enclosures th at d o not oth erwise clearl y show that they con tain electrical equ ipment th at can
give rise to a risk of electric shock sh al l be marked with the graphical symbol I SO 701 0-W01 2
(see Figure 1 8).
Figure 1 8 – Symbol ISO 701 0-W01 2
The warning sign shall be plainl y visible on th e enclosure d oor or cover.
The warn ing sign may be omitted (see also 6. 2. 2 b)) for:
–
–
–
an enclosure equipped with a supply d isconnecting d evice;
an operator-mach in e interface or con trol station;
a sin gl e d evice with its own enclosu re (for example position sensor).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 92 –
1 6.2.2
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Hot surfaces hazard
Where the risk assessmen t shows the need to warn against the possibil ity of hazard ous
su rface temperatures of the el ectrical equipment, th e graphical symbol I SO 701 0-W01 7 shall
be used (see Figure 1 9).
Figure 1 9 – Symbol ISO 701 0-W01 7
N OTE I SO 1 3732-1 g i ves gu i d an ce for th e assessm en t of th e ri sks of bu rn s wh en h u m an s m i gh t tou ch h ot
su rfaces wi th th ei r u n protected ski n .
1 6.3
Functional identification
Control devices and visu al ind icators shal l be clearl y and d urabl y marked with regard to th eir
fu nctions eith er on or ad jacen t to th e item. I t is recommend ed th at such markings are mad e in
accord ance with I EC 6041 7 and I SO 7000.
1 6.4
Marking of enclosures of electrical equipment
The following in formation shall be legibl y an d d u rabl y marked in a way th at is pl ain ly visible
after the equipmen t is instal led on enclosures th at receive incoming power su ppl ies:
•
name or trad e mark of su pplier;
•
type designation or mod el , wh ere applicable;
•
serial number where appl icable;
•
main d ocumen t nu mber (see I EC 62023) where applicable;
•
rated voltage, nu mber of phases an d frequ ency (if AC), an d fu l l-load cu rrent for each
incoming suppl y.
 Text deleted 
I t is recommend ed that this information is provid ed ad jacent to the main incomin g suppl y(ies).
1 6.5
Reference designations
All enclosures, assemblies, con trol d evices, and components shal l be plain l y id en tified with
the same reference d esignation as sh own in the techn ical documen tation.
1 7 Technical documentation
1 7.1
General
The information necessary for id en tification , transport, installation, use, maintenance,
d ecommissioning and d isposal of the el ectrical equ ipment sh all be supplied .
N OTE 1 Docu m en tati on i s som eti m es su ppl i ed i n paper form , si n ce i t can n ot be assu m ed th at th e u ser h as
access to th e m ean s of read i n g i n stru cti on s su ppl i ed i n el ectron i c form or m ad e avai l abl e on an I n tern et si te.
H owever, i t i s often u sefu l for th e d ocu m en tati on to be mad e avai l abl e i n el ectron i c form an d on th e I n tern et as wel l
as i n paper form , si n ce th i s en abl es th e u ser to d own l oad th e el ectron i c fi l e i f h e so wi sh es an d to recover th e
d ocu men tati on i f th e paper copy h as been l ost. Th i s practi ce al so faci l i tates th e u pd ati n g of th e d ocu m en tati on
wh en th i s i s n ecessary.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 93 –
N OTE 2 I n som e cou n tri es, th e req u i rem en t to u se speci fi c l an g u ag e(s) i s covered by l egal req u i rem en ts.
An nex I shou ld be consid ered as guid ance for the preparation of in formation and docu men ts.
1 7. 2
I n fo rm a t i o n re l a t e d t o t h e e l e c t ri c a l
eq u i pm en t
The fol lowing shall be suppl ied :
a) wh ere more th an one d ocu men t is provid ed , a main docu men t for the electrical equ ipmen t
as a whole, l isting th e complemen tary d ocu men ts associated with the el ectrical
equ ipmen t;
b) id entification of the electrical equipment (see 1 6. 4);
c) in formation on install ation and moun ting includ ing:
•
a d escription of the electrical equ ipment’s install ation and moun ting, and its con nection
to the electrical su pplies and wh ere relevan t other su ppl ies;
•
sh ort-circu it curren t rating of the electrical equ ipmen t for each incomin g power supply;
•
rated voltage, nu mber of phases and freq uency (if AC. ), type of d istribu tion system
(TT, TN , I T) and fu l l-load curren t for each incomin g supply;
•
an y ad ditional electrical su ppl y(ies) requ irements (for example maximum su ppl y source
imped ance, l eakage curren t) for each incoming suppl y;
•
space requ ired for th e removal or servicing of the electrical eq uipmen t;
•
installation requiremen ts where need ed to ensure th at th e arran gemen ts for cooling
are n ot impaired ;
•
en viron men tal limitations (for example ligh ting,
atmospheric con taminants) wh ere appropriate;
•
fu nctional l imitations (for example peak starting curren ts an d permitted vol tage
d rop(s)) as applicable;
vibration,
EM C
en vironment,
precau tions to be taken for th e instal l ation of the electrical equ ipmen t relevan t to the
electromagnetic compatibility;
d ) an instruction for the connection of simul taneously accessible extran eous-con d uctiveparts in the vicinity of the machine (for example, within 2, 5 metres) such as the foll owing
to the protective bond ing circu it:
•
•
metal lic pipes;
•
fences;
•
l ad d ers;
h and rails.
e) in formation on the functioning and operation , includ in g as appl icable:
•
•
an overview of the structure of the electrical equipment (for example by structure
d iagram or overview d iagram);
•
proced ures for programming or con figuring, as necessary for the in tend ed use;
•
proced ures for restarting after an unexpected stop;
a sequ ence of operation ;
f) in formation on main ten ance of th e electrical equ ipmen t, as appropriate, inclu d ing:
•
•
frequ ency and method of fu nctional testin g;
•
instructions on the proced ures for safe main tenance and wh ere it is n ecessary to
suspend a safety function and /or protective measu re (see 9. 3. 6);
•
guid ance on th e ad justmen t, repair, and frequency and meth od of preven tive
main tenance;
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 94 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
•
d etails of the in tercon nections of the electrical componen ts su bject to replacemen t (for
example by circuit d iagrams and /or connection tables);
•
in formation on requ ired special d evices or tools;
•
information on spare parts;
•
information on possible residual risks, in dication of wheth er an y particu lar train ing is
required an d specification of an y necessary personal protective equipmen t;
•
wh ere appl icable, instructions to restrict availability of key(s) or tool(s) to skill ed or
instructed persons on l y;
•
settin gs (DI P-switches, programmabl e parameter valu es, etc);
in formation for valid ation of safety related con trol fu nctions after repair or mod ification ,
and for period ic testin g wh ere necessary;
g) in formation on hand lin g, transportation and storage as appropriate (for example
d imensions, weigh t, environmental cond itions, possible agein g constraints);
h) in formation for proper d isassembl y an d hand ling of compon en ts (for example for recycling
or d isposal).
•
1 8 Veri fi cati on
1 8.1
General
The exten t of verification will be given in the d ed icated product stand ard for a particu lar
machin e. Wh ere there is no d ed icated prod uct stand ard for th e mach in e, th e verifications
sh all always incl ud e th e items a), b), c) an d h) an d may includ e one or more of the items d) to
g):
a) verification th at the el ectrical equ ipment complies with its techn ical d ocu men tation;
b) verification of con tinuity of the protective bond ing circuit (Test 1 of 1 8. 2. 2);
c) in case of faul t protection by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y, cond itions for protection
by au tomatic d isconnection shall be verified accord ing to 1 8. 2;
d ) insu lation resistance test (see 1 8. 3);
e) voltage test (see 1 8. 4);
f) protection against residu al vol tage (see 1 8. 5);
g) verification th at the rel evan t requ irements of 8. 2. 6 are met;
h ) functional tests (see 1 8. 6).
 Where the sequence cannot be followed veri cation a) and b) shall be conducted
rst. 
Wh en these tests are performed , it is recommended th at they fol low th e sequence l isted
above.
f
f
Wh en th e electrical equ ipmen t is mod ified , the requiremen ts stated in 1 8. 7 shall appl y.
For verifications th at includ e measu remen t, measurin g equ ipmen t in accord ance with the
I EC 61 557 series is recommend ed .
The resul ts of the verification shall be docu men ted .
1 8.2
1 8.2.1
Verifi cati on of con di ti on s for protecti on by au tomatic discon n ecti on of su ppl y
Gen eral
The cond itions for au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y (see 6. 3. 3) sh all be verified by tests.
Test 1 verifies the con tinuity of the protective bond ing circuit.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 95 –
Test 2 verifies the cond itions for protection by au tomatic d isconnection of the supply in TN
systems.
For TN -systems, th ose test methods are d escribed in 1 8. 2. 2 and 1 8. 2. 3; th eir application for
d ifferen t cond itions of suppl y are specified in 1 8. 2. 4.
For TT systems, see Clause A. 2.
For I T systems, see I EC 60364-6.
Wh ere RCDs are used in th e electrical eq uipmen t, their function shal l be verified in
accord ance with the man u facturer’s instructions. Th e test proced ure and test in terval shal l be
specified in th e main tenance instructions.
1 8.2.2 Test 1 – Verification of the continuity of the protective bonding circuit
The resistance between th e PE terminal (see 5. 2 and Figu re 4) and relevan t poin ts th at are
part of th e protective bond ing circu it sh al l be measured with a curren t between at least 0, 2 A
and approximately 1 0 A d erived from an electricall y separated supply source (for example
SELV, see 41 4 of I EC 60364-4-41 : 2005) h aving a maximum no-load vol tage of 24 V AC or
DC.
The resistance measured shal l be in the expected range accord ing to th e length , the cross
sectional area and the material of th e rel ated protective con d uctors and protective bon d ing
cond uctor(s).
Earthed PELV supplies can produce mislead ing resu l ts in this test an d th erefore shal l n ot be
used .
N OTE Larg er cu rren ts u sed for th e con ti n u i ty test i n creases th e accu racy of th e test resu l t, especi al l y wi th l ow
resi stan ce val u es, i . e. l arg er cross secti on al areas an d /or l ower con d u ctor l en g th s.
1 8.2.3 Test 2 – Fault loop impedance verification and suitability of the associated
overcurrent protective device
The conn ections of each power suppl y includ in g the connection of the associated protective
cond uctor to th e PE terminal of the machine, sh all be verified by inspection .
The con d itions for the protection by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y in accord ance with
6. 3. 3 and An nex A sh al l be verified by both :
a) verification of the faul t loop imped ance by:
– calcu lation, or
– measuremen t in accord ance with A. 1 . 4, and
b) con firmation that the setting and characteristics of the associated overcu rrent protective
d evice are in accord ance with th e requ irements of Ann ex A, and where a power d rive
system (PDS) is used , con firmation that the setting and characteristics of th e protective
d evice(s) associated with a PDS are in accord ance with the converter manu facturer’s an d
protective d evice manufacturer’s instructions.
1 8.2.4 Application of the test methods for TN-systems
Wh en Test 2 of 1 8. 2. 3 is carried out by measuremen t, it shal l always be preced ed by Test 1 of
1 8. 2. 2.
N OTE A d iscon ti n u ity of th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i t can cau se a h azard ou s si tu ati on for th e tester or oth er
person s, or d am ag e to th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t d u ri n g th e l oop i m ped an ce test.
The tests that are n ecessary for machines of d ifferen t status are specified in Table 9.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 96 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Table 9 – Application of the test methods for TN-systems
Procedure
A
B
Machine status
El ectri cal eq u i pm en t of m ach i n es, erected an d
con n ected on si te, wh ere th e con ti n u i ty of th e
protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts h as n ot been
con fi rm ed fol l owi n g erecti on an d con n ecti on
on si te.
M ach i n e su ppl i ed wi th con fi rmati on of th e
veri fi cati on (see 1 8. 1 ) of con ti n u i ty of th e
protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts by test 1 or wi th
th e resu l ts of a test 2 by m easu rem en t,
h avi n g protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts exceed i n g
th e cabl e l en g th for wh i ch exam pl es are g i ven
i n Tabl e 1 0.
Case B1 ) su ppl i ed fu l l y assembl ed an d n ot
d ism an tl ed for sh i pm en t,
C
Verification on site
Test 1 (see 1 8. 2 . 2) an d test 2 (see 1 8. 2. 3)
Excepti on : Test 2 i s n ot req u i red wh ere:
– test 1 i s perform ed on th e protecti ve
bon d i n g con d u ctors of th e mach i n e th at
are con n ected on si te, an d ;
–
th e con n ecti on s of each i n com i n g power
su ppl y an d of th e associ ated protecti ve
con d u ctor (PE) to th e PE-term i n al of th e
m ach i n e, are veri fi ed by i n specti on , an d
previ ou s cal cu l ati on s of th e fau l t l oop
i m ped an ce (or resi stan ce) by th e
m an u factu rer of th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t
are avai l abl e, an d :
–
th e arran g em en t of th e i n stal l ati on s
perm i ts th e veri fi cati on of th e l en gth an d
cross-secti on al area of th e con d u ctors
u sed for th e cal cu l ati on , an d ;
–
i t can be con fi rm ed th rou g h cal cu l ati on or
m easu rem en t, or by i n form ati on su ppl i ed
by th e cu stomer, th at th e su ppl y sou rce
i m ped an ce on si te d oes n ot exceed th e
val u e speci fi ed by th e m an u factu rer of
th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t. See 1 7. 2 c),
fou rth bu l l et).
Test 2 (see 1 8. 2 . 3)
Excepti on :
Wh ere i t can be con fi rm ed th rou g h
cal cu l ati on or m easu rem en t, or by i n form ation
su ppl i ed by th e cu stom er, th at th e su ppl y
sou rce i m ped an ce on si te d oes n ot exceed
th e val u e speci fi ed by th e m an u factu rer of th e
el ectri cal eq u i pm en t, or th at of th e test su ppl y
d u ri n g a test 2 by m easu rem en t, n o test i s
req u i red on si te apart from veri fi cati on of th e
con n ecti on s:
•
i n case B1 ) of each i n com i n g power
su ppl y an d of th e associ ated protecti ve
con d u ctor to th e PE termi n al of th e
m ach i n e;
i n case B2) of each i n com i n g power
su ppl y an d of th e associ ated protecti ve
con d u ctor to th e PE termi n al of th e
m ach i n e an d of al l con n ecti on s of th e
protecti ve
con d u ctor(s)
th at
were
d i scon n ected for sh i pmen t.
Case B2 ) su ppl i ed d i sm an tl ed for sh i pm en t,
wh ere th e con ti n u i ty of protecti ve con d u ctors
i s en su red after d i sm an tl i n g , tran sportati on
an d reassem bl y (for exam pl e by th e u se of
pl u g/socket con n ecti on s).
•
M ach i n e h avin g protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts
n ot exceed i n g th e cabl e l en g th for wh i ch
exam pl es are gi ven i n Tabl e 1 0, su ppl i ed wi th
con fi rm ati on of th e veri fi cati on (see 1 8. 1 ) of
con ti n u i ty of th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts by
test 1 .
For case C1 or C2, n o test i s req u i red on si te.
For a m ach i n e n ot con n ected to th e power
su ppl y by a pl u g /socket com bi n ation , th e
correct con n ecti on of th e extern al protective
con d u ctor to th e PE-termi n al of th e m ach i n e
sh al l be veri fi ed by vi su al i n specti on .
Case C1 ) su ppl i ed fu l l y assem bl ed an d n ot
d i sm an tl ed for sh i pm en t.
Case C2) su ppl i ed d i sm an tl ed for sh i pm en t,
wh ere th e con ti n u i ty of protecti ve con d u ctors
i s en su red after d i sm an tl i n g , tran sportati on
an d reassem bl y (for exam pl e by th e u se of
pl u g/socket com bi n ati on (s)).
I n case C2 ), th e i n stal l ati on d ocu m en ts (see
1 7. 2 ) sh al l req u i re th at al l con n ecti on s of th e
protective con d u ctor(s) th at were
d i scon n ected for sh i pmen t are veri fi ed , for
exam pl e by vi su al i n specti on .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 97 –
Table 1 0 – Examples of maximum cable lengths from
protective devices to their loads for TN-systems
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Maximum
Maximum
Minimum
Fuse Miniature Miniature Miniature AdjustaFuse
source
nominal
crossdiscon- discon- circuit- circuit- circuitble
impedance of sectional area rating or nect time nect time breaker breaker breaker circuitthe supply to
setting of the
char.C
5s
0,4 s
char.B
char.D breaker
the
protective
Ia = 5 × IN Ia = 1 0 ×
Ia = 20 ×
Ia = 8 ×
protective
device
IN
IN
IN
device
IN
A
Maximum cable length in m from
mm2
mΩ
each protective device to its load
500
1 ,5
16
97
53
76
30
7
31
500
2,5
20
115
57
94
34
3
36
500
4, 0
25
1 35
66
114
35
38
400
6, 0
32
1 45
59
1 33
40
42
300
10
50
1 25
41
1 32
33
37
73
1 79
55
200
16
63
1 75
200
25 (l i n e)/1 6
(PE)
80
1 33
38
61
1 00
35 (l i n e)/1 6
(PE)
1 00
1 36
73
1 00
50 (l i n e)/25
(PE)
1 25
1 41
66
1 00
70 (l i n e)/35
(PE)
1 60
1 38
46
50
95 (l i n e)/50
(PE )
200
1 52
98
50
1 20 (l i n e)/70
(PE)
250
1 57
79
Th e val u es of th e m axi m u m cabl e l en g th i n Tabl e 1 0 are based on th e fol l owi n g assu mpti on s:
• PVC cabl e wi th copper con d u ctors, con d u ctor tem peratu re u n d er sh ort-ci rcu i t con d i ti on s
1 60 ° C (see Tabl e D. 5);
•
cabl es wi th l i n e con d u ctors u p to 1 6 m m 2 provi d e a protecti ve con d u ctor of eq u al cross
secti on al area to th at of th e l i n e con d u ctors;
•
•
•
•
cabl es above 1 6 m m 2 provi d e a red u ced si ze protecti ve con d u ctor as sh own ;
3-ph ase system , n omi n al vol tag e of th e power su ppl y 400 V ( U0 = 230 V);
col u m n 3 val u es are correl ated wi th Tabl e 6 (see 1 2. 4).
d iscon n ecti on ti m e for ci rcu i t-breakers i s
≤ 0, 4 s (col u mn s 6 – 9)
A d evi ati on from th ese assu mpti on s can req u i re a com pl ete cal cu l ation or m easu rem en t of th e fau l t
l oop i m ped an ce. Fu rth er i n form ati on i s avai l abl e from I EC 6022 8 an d I EC TR 61 200-53.
1 8.3
Insulation resistance tests
Wh en insu lation resistance tests are performed , the insu lation resistance measu red at
500 V DC between the power circuit cond uctors and the protective bond ing circu it sh all be not
less than 1 M Ω . The test may be mad e on ind ivid u al sections of th e complete el ectrical
installation .
Exception: for certain parts of electrical equipmen t, incorporating for example busbars,
conductor wire or con ductor bar systems or sl ip-rin g assembl ies, a lower min imum valu e is
permitted , bu t that valu e shal l n ot be l ess th an 50 k Ω .
I f th e electrical equipmen t of th e mach in e con tains surge protection devices which are l ikely to
operate d urin g the test, it is permitted to either:
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 98 –
–
–

I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
d isconnect th ese d evices, or
reduce the test vol tage to a value lower than th e voltage protection level of the surge
protection d evices, bu t n ot lower than th e peak val ue of the upper l imit of the supply
(phase to n eu tral) voltage.
1 8.4
Voltage tests
When voltage tests are performed, tests and test equipment shall be in accordance with EN 61 1 80.
The test vol tage sh all be at a nominal frequency of 50 H z or 60 H z.
The maximu m test voltage shal l h ave a valu e of twice the rated su pply vol tage of the
equ ipmen t or 1 000 V, whichever is the greater. The maximu m test voltage shal l be applied
between the power circuit con d uctors and th e protective bond ing circu it for at l east 1 s. The
requ iremen ts are satisfied if no d isru ptive d ischarge occurs.
Componen ts and devices th at are not rated to withstand the test voltage and surge protection
d evices wh ich are l ikely to operate d u ring the test sh al l be d isconnected du ring testin g.
Componen ts and devices th at have been vol tage tested in accord ance with their prod uct
stand ards may be d isconn ected d uring testing.
1 8.5
Protection against residual voltages
Wh ere appropriate, tests shal l be performed to ensure compliance with 6. 2. 4.
1 8.6
Functional tests
The fu nctions of el ectrical equ ipment sh all be tested .
1 8.7
Retesting
Wh ere a portion of the machine or its associated equipmen t is ch anged or mod ified , th e need
for re-verification an d testing of the electrical equ ipmen t shall be considered .
Particu lar atten tion shoul d be given to the possibl e ad verse effects that retestin g can h ave on
th e eq uipmen t (for example overstressing of insu lation , d isconnection /reconnection of
d evices).

BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 99 –
Annex A
(normative)
Fault protection by automatic disconnection of supply
A.1
Fault protection for machines supplied from TN-systems
A.1 .1
General
The provisions in the Ann ex A are d erived from I EC 60364-4-41 : 2005, and I EC 60364-6: 2006.
Fau lt protection shall be provid ed by an overcu rrent protective device that automatically
d isconnects th e su pply to the circu it or equ ipmen t in the event of a fau lt between a l ive part
and an exposed conductive part or a protective conductor in the circu it or equipmen t, within a
sufficiently short d isconn ecting time. A d isconnectin g time n ot exceed in g 5 s is consid ered
sufficiently sh ort for mach in es that are neither hand -hel d nor portable.
Wh ere th is d isconnecting time cannot be assured , su pplemen tary protective bond ing sh al l be
provided in accordance with A. 1 . 3 that can preven t a prospective touch voltage from
exceed ing 50 V AC or 1 20 V ripple-free DC between simu ltaneousl y accessible con d uctive
parts.
N OTE Th e u se of su ppl em en tary protecti ve bon d i n g d oes n ot precl u d e th e n eed to d i scon n ect th e su ppl y for oth er
reason s, for exam pl e protecti on ag ai n st fi re, th erm al stresses i n eq u i pm en t, etc.
For circu its wh ich su pply, through socket-ou tl ets or d irectl y withou t socket-ou tlets, Class 1
h and -held eq uipmen t or portabl e eq uipmen t (for example socket-outl ets on a mach in e for
accessory eq uipmen t, see 1 5. 1 ) Table A. 1 specifies the maximum d isconnectin g times that
are consid ered su fficien tly short.
Table A.1 – Maximum disconnecting times for TN systems
System
50 V <
U0 ≤ 1 20 V
1 20 V <
s
TN
U0 ≤ 230 V
230 V <
s
U0 ≤ 400 V
U0 > 400 V
s
s
AC
DC
AC
DC
AC
DC
AC
DC
0, 8
N OTE 1
0, 4
5
0, 2
0, 4
0, 1
0, 1
Uo i s th e n omi n al AC or DC l i n e to earth vol tag e.
N OTE 1
Di scon n ecti on m ay be req u i red for reason s oth er th an protecti on ag ai n st el ectri c sh ock.
N OTE 2 For vol tag es wh i ch are wi th i n th e tol eran ce ban d stated i n I EC 60038, th e d i scon n ecti n g ti m e
appropri ate to th e n om i n al vol tag e appl i es.
N OTE 3 For i n term ed i ate val u es of vol tage, th e n ext h i g h er val u e i n th e above tabl e i s to be u sed .
A.1 .2
Conditions for protection by automatic disconnection of the supply by
overcurrent protective devices
The characteristics of overcurrent protective d evices an d the circu it imped ances shall be such
th at, if a faul t of n egligibl e impedance occurs anywh ere in the electrical equ ipment between a
l ine cond uctor an d a protective con ductor or exposed cond uctive part, au tomatic
d isconnection of the supply wil l occur within th e specified time (i. e. ≤ 5 s or ≤ values in
accord ance with Table A. 1 ). Th e following gen eral con dition fu lfils this req uiremen t:
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 00 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Zs × Ia ≤ U0
wh ere
Zs is th e imped ance of the fault l oop comprising the source, th e l ive cond uctor u p to th e poin t
of the fault an d the protective cond uctor between th e poin t of th e fau l t and th e sou rce;
Ia is the curren t causing th e au tomatic operation of the d isconnectin g protective d evice
with in th e specified time;
Uo is the nominal AC vol tage to earth .
The increase of th e resistance of the cond uctors with the increase of temperature du e to the
faul t curren t sh all be taken into accoun t in the fol lowin g equation :
2 U0
3 Ia
Zs ≤ ×
(n)
wh ere Zs (n ) is the measu red or calcu lated valu e of Zs un d er n ormal operatin g con d itions.
Where the valu e of th e faul t loop imped ance exceeds 2 U0 /3 Ia , a more precise assessmen t
can be mad e in accord ance with the proced ure described in C. 61 . 3. 6. 2 of I EC 60364-6: 2006.
A.1 .3
Condition for protection by reducing the touch voltage below 50 V
Wh ere the requ irements of A. 1 . 2 can not be assu red , suppl ementary protective bond ing can
be selected as th e means of ensurin g that touch vol tages wil l not exceed 50 V. This is
achieved when the imped ance of the protective bond ing circuit ( ZPE ) does n ot exceed :
50 × ZS
ZPE ≤ U
0
wh ere ZPE is the imped ance of th e protective bon d ing circu it between the equ ipment
an ywhere in the instal lation and the PE terminal of the mach in e (see 5. 2 and Figure 4) or
between simu l taneously accessible exposed cond uctive parts and /or extraneous-cond uctiveparts.
Confirmation of th is con d ition can be achieved by usin g the method of Test 1 of 1 8. 2. 2 to
measure the resistance R PE . Th e cond ition for protection is achieved wh en the measured
valu e of R PE d oes n ot exceed :
RPE ≤
50
Ia(5s)
wh ere
Ia(5s) is the 5 s operating current of the protective d evice;
R PE is the resistance of the protective bond in g circu it between th e PE terminal (see 5. 2
and Figure 4) an d the equipment an ywhere on the machine, or between
simul taneousl y accessible exposed cond uctive parts an d /or extraneous-con ductiveparts.
N OTE 1
Su ppl em en tary protecti ve bon d i n g i s con si d ered as an ad d i ti on to fau l t protecti on .
N OTE 2 Su ppl em en tary protecti ve bon d i n g m ay i n vol ve th e en ti re i n stal l ati on , a part of th e i n stal l ati on , an i tem of
apparatu s, or a l ocati on .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 01 –
A.1 .4
Verification of conditions for protection by automatic disconnection of the
supply
A.1 .4.1
General
The effectiveness of the measures for faul t protection by automatic d isconnection of suppl y in
accord ance with A. 1 . 2 is verified as follows:
–
–
verification of the ch aracteristics of th e associated protective d evice by visual inspection
of the n ominal cu rrent setting for circu it-breakers and th e curren t ratin g for fuses, an d ;
measurement of the fault loop imped ance ( Zs ). See Figure A. 1 .
Exception : Verification of the contin uity of the protective cond uctors may replace the
measuremen t where the calcu lations of th e faul t l oop imped ance are avail able and wh en the
arran gemen t of the installations permits the verification of the l ength and cross-section al area
of the conductors.
Wh ere a power d rive system (PDS) is used , th e d iscon nection time for faul t protection shall
meet th e relevan t requ iremen ts of this Annex A at th e incoming suppl y terminals of th e basic
d rive modu le (BDM ) of the PDS. See Figure A. 2.
A.1 .4.2
Measurement of the fault loop impedance
Wh ere measu remen t of th e fau lt l oop imped ance is performed , it is recommen d ed that the
measuring eq uipmen t compl y with I EC 61 557-3. The in formation abou t the accuracy of th e
measuring resul ts, and th e proced ures to be fol lowed given in th e d ocumen tation of th e
measuring eq uipmen t shal l be considered .
M easurement sh all be performed when the machine is con nected to a supply having th e same
frequ ency as th e nominal frequency of the su pply at the in tend ed installation .
N OTE
Fi g u re A. 1 i l l u strates a typi cal arran gem en t for measu ri n g th e fau l t l oop i m ped an ce on a m ach i n e.
I f it is not practicable for th e motor to be con nected during th e test, the two line con d uctors
n ot used in th e test may be opened , for example, by removing fuses.
The measured value of th e fau lt loop imped ance sh all be in accord ance with A. 1 . 2.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 02 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Machine
M
3~
PE
Fault loop
impedance tester
in accordance with
IEC 61 557-3
Power supply
L1
L2
Zs
L3
PE
To other circuits of the
electrical equipment
IEC
Figure A.1 – Typical arrangement for fault loop
impedance ( Zs ) measurement in TN systems
Machine
Power Drive System
BDM
M
3~
PE
Power supply
Zs
L1
L2
Fault loop
impedance tester
in accordance with
IEC 61 557-3
L3
PE
To other circuits of the
electrical equipment
Figure A.2 – Typical arrangement for fault loop impedance ( Zs )
measurement for power drive system circuits in TN systems
IEC
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
A.2
– 1 03 –
Fault protection for machines supplied from TT-systems
A.2.1
Connection to earth
Al l exposed-cond uctive-parts an d al l extraneous-cond uctive-parts sh al l be bond ed to the
protective bond ing circuit.
Exception:
see 8. 2. 5.
I n add ition to the requ irements of 5. 2, provision for ad d itional earth in g of mach in e elemen ts
and /or the PE con ductor of the electrical equ ipmen t may be provid ed .
N OTE I n a TT system , th e n eu tral poi n t or th e m i d -poi n t of th e power su ppl y system i s earth ed , or wh ere a n eu tral
poi n t or mi d -poi n t i s n ot avai l abl e or n ot accessi bl e, a l i n e con d u ctor i s earth ed (d eri ved from I EC 60364-441 : 2005, 41 1 . 5. 1 ).
A.2.2 Fault protection for TT systems
A.2.2.1
General
Generally in TT systems, RCDs shall be used for fault protection . Alternativel y, overcurren t
protective d evices may be used for faul t protection provid ed a suitably low value of Zs is
permanen tl y and rel iably assured . Zs is the imped ance of the fault loop.
N OTE I n some cou n tri es th e u se of overcu rren t protecti ve d evi ces i s n ot permi tted as th e m ean s of fau l t
protecti on i n TT systems.
Wh ere au tomatic d iscon nection of supply is used as a measure for fau lt protection , the
electrical equipmen t d esign er may either:
a) use in the d esign calculations a valu e of earth el ectrod e resistance or earth fau l t l oop
imped ance measured in accord ance with I EC 60364-6 or d eclared by the in tend ed user of
the eq uipmen t (see Annex B); or
b) for series-manufactured machines, specify a valu e of th e earth electrod e resistance or
earth fau lt l oop imped ance suitable for the in tended installations;
and shall state in th e instal lation instructions the valu e of earth electrod e resistance or earth
fault loop imped ance used for the design of the electrical equ ipmen t, specifying that th is is the
maximu m value to wh ich th e mach ine can be conn ected .
Wh ere a power drive system (PDS) is used , th e d iscon nection time for fault protection shall
meet the relevan t req uirements of this An nex A at th e incoming su ppl y terminals of th e basic
d rive modu le (BDM ) of the PDS. See Figure A. 4.
A.2.2.2
Protection by residual current protective device (RCD)
Wh ere a residu al cu rren t protective d evice (RCD) is used for fau lt protection , the fol lowing
cond itions shal l be ful filled :
a) d isconnection time as req uired by Table A. 2, an d
b) R A × I∆ n ≤ 50 V
wh ere:
RA
I∆ n
is the sum of the resistances of the earth electrod e an d th e protective con ductor for
each exposed cond uctive-part,
is the rated resid ual operatin g curren t of the RCD.
Exception: a d isconn ection time not exceed ing 1 s is permitted for d istribution circuits and for
circu its n ot covered by Tabl e A. 2.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 04 –
N OTE 1
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Fau l t protecti on i s provi d ed i n th i s case al so i f th e fau l t i m ped an ce i s n ot n eg l i gi bl e.
N OTE 2 Wh ere d i scri m i n ati on between RCDs i s n ecessary, i n form ati on i s gi ven i n 535. 3 of I EC 60364-5-53: 2001 .
N OTE 3 Th e d i scon n ecti on ti m es i n accord an ce wi th Tabl e A. 2 rel ate to prospecti ve resi d u al fau l t cu rren ts
si g n i fi can tl y h i gh er th an th e rated resi d u al operati n g cu rren t of th e RCD (typi cal l y 5 I∆ n ).
N OTE 4 Th e d efi n i ti on of R A is extracted from I EC 60364-4-41 . I n th i s part of I EC 60204, th e term “earth
el ectrod e” i n th e d efi n i ti on of R A i s con si d ered to m ean th e “earth -retu rn path ” as d efi n ed by I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998,
1 95-02 -30.
A.2.2.3
Protection by overcurrent protective devices
Wh ere an overcurren t protective d evice is used the followin g cond ition shall be ful fill ed :
Zs × Ia ≤ Uo
wh ere:
Zs is the imped ance of the fault loop comprising :
th e sou rce,
th e lin e cond uctor up to th e point of th e fau lt,
th e protective cond uctor of each exposed -cond uctive-part,
th e earth ing cond uctor,
th e earth electrod e of the instal lation and th e earth el ectrod e of th e source;
Ia is the current causing the au tomatic operation of th e d iscon nectin g device with in the time
specified in Table A. 2.
Exception : a d isconnection time n ot exceed ing 1 s is permitted for circuits not covered by
Table A. 2.
Uo is the nominal AC or DC l ine to earth vol tage.
The maximum d isconnection times stated in Table A. 2 sh al l be appl ied to circuits n ot
exceed in g 32 A. Maximu m d isconnection times sh all n ot exceed 1 s for circuits 32 A or
greater.
Table A.2 – Maximum disconnecting time for TT-systems
System
50 V <
Uo ≤ 1 20 V
1 20 V <
s
TT
Uo ≤ 230 V
230 V <
s
Uo ≤ 400 V
Uo > 400 V
s
s
AC
DC
AC
DC
AC
DC
AC
DC
0, 3
N OTE
0, 2
0, 4
0, 07
0, 2
0, 04
0, 1
Wh ere i n TT system s th e d i scon n ecti on i s ach i eved by an overcu rren t protecti ve d evi ce an d al l extran eou scon d u cti ve-parts wi l l be con n ected to th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i t, th e m axi m u m d i scon n ecti on ti m es speci fi ed
i n Tabl e A. 1 may be u sed .
Uo i s th e n omi n al AC or DC l i n e to earth vol tag e.
N OTE
A.2.3
Di scon n ecti on can be req u i red for reason s oth er th an protecti on ag ai n st el ectri c sh ock.
Verification of protection by automatic disconnection of supply using a
residual current protective device
Fau l t protection in a TT system by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y using a resid ual curren t
protective d evice shall be verified by th e following:
•
inspection of the rated resid ual curren t for tripping value, and the d isconn ecting time valu e
of the resid ual curren t protective d evice, and
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 05 –
•
verification that the resid ual curren t protective device has been tested in accordance with
a relevant I EC standard , and
•
inspection of th e con nections to the residu al cu rren t protective device and protective
bond in g circu it.
A.2.4
Measurement of the fault loop impedance ( Zs )
Wh ere measu remen t of th e fau lt loop imped ance is performed th e measuring equ ipmen t
shou ld comply with I EC 61 557-3. The information about th e accuracy of the measurin g
resul ts, and the proced u res to be fol lowed given in the d ocumen tation of th e measuring
equ ipmen t shal l be consid ered .
The measuremen t sh al l be performed with th e electrical eq uipmen t connected to a su pply of
between 99 % and 1 01 % the nominal frequ ency of the supply at the in ten d ed instal lation.
N OTE 1
Fi g u re A. 3 i l l u strates a typi cal arran g em en t for m easu ri n g th e fau l t l oop i m ped an ce on a m ach i n e.
I f it is not practicable for th e motor to be con nected during th e test, the two line con d uctors
n ot used in th e test may be opened , for example, by removing fuses.
N OTE 2 Fi g u re A. 4 i l l u strates a typi cal arran g em en t for measu ri n g th e fau l t l oop i m ped an ce wh en a power d ri ve
system i s u sed .
The measured value of th e fau lt loop imped ance sh all be in accord ance with A. 2. 2. 3.
N OTE 3 I n form ati on on th e veri fi cati on of perform an ce of a resi d u al cu rren t protecti ve d evi ce an d m easu rem en t of
earth fau l t l oop i m ped an ce can be fou n d i n I EC 60364-6.
Machine
M
3~
PE
Fault loop
impedance tester
in accordance with
IEC 61 557-3
Power supply
L1
L2
Zs
L3
PE
PE
To other circuits of the
electrical equipment
Figure A.3 – Typical arrangement for fault loop
impedance ( Zs ) measurement in TT systems
IEC
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 06 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Machine
Power Drive System
BDM
M
3~
PE
Power supply
Zs
L1
L2
Fault loop
impedance tester
in accordance with
IEC 61 557-3
L3
PE
To other circuits of the
electrical equipment
Figure A.4 – Typical arrangement for fault loop impedance ( Zs )
measurement for power drive system circuits in TT systems
IEC
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 07 –
Annex B
(informative)
Enquiry form for the electrical equipment of machines
The use of th is enqu iry form can facilitate an exch ange of in formation between th e user and
supplier on basic cond itions and add itional user req uirements to en able suitable d esign,
application and util ization of th e electrical eq uipmen t of the machine (see 4. 1 ) particu larl y
wh en the con ditions on site can d eviate from those gen erall y expected .
An nex B can also serve as an in ternal ch eckl ist for serial man ufactu red mach in es.
N am e of m an u factu rer/su ppl i er
N am e of en d u ser
Ten d er/ord er n u m ber
Type of m ach i n e
Date
Type d esi g n ati on
Seri al n u m ber
1.
Special conditions (see Clause 1 )
a)
I s th e mach i n e to be u sed i n th e open ai r?
Yes/N o
I f yes, speci fi cati on
b)
Wi l l th e m ach i n e u se, process or prod u ce
expl osi ve or fl am m abl e material ?
Yes/N o
I f yes, speci fi cati on
c)
I s th e mach i n e for u se i n poten ti al l y expl osi ve or
fl amm abl e atmosph eres?
Yes/N o
I f yes, speci fi cati on
d)
Can th e m ach i n e presen t speci al h azard s wh en
prod u ci n g or con su mi n g certai n m ateri al s?
Yes/N o
I f yes, speci fi cati on
e)
I s th e mach i n e for u se i n m i n es?
Yes/N o
I f yes, specifi cati on
2.
El ectrical supplies and related conditions (see
4.3)
a)
An ti ci pated vol tag e fl u ctu ati on s (i f m ore th an
± 1 0 %)
b)
An ti ci pated freq u en cy fl u ctu ati on s (i f m ore th an
±2 % )
Con ti n u ou s
Sh ort ti m e
c)
I n d i cate possi bl e fu tu re ch an ges i n el ectrical
eq u i pm en t th at wi l l req u i re an i n crease i n th e
el ectri cal su ppl y req u i rem en ts
d)
Speci fy vol tag e i n terru pti on s i n su ppl y i f l on ger
th an speci fi ed i n Cl au se 4 wh ere el ectri cal
eq u i pm en t h as to m ai n tai n operati on u n d er su ch
con d i ti on s
3.
Ph ysi cal en vironment and operating conditi ons
(see 4. 4)
a)
El ectrom ag n eti c en vi ron m en t (see 4. 4. 2)
Resi d en ti al ,
com merci al or
l ig h t i n d u stri al
en vi ron men t
I n d u stri al
en vi ron men t
Speci al EM C con d i ti on s or req u i rem en ts
b)
Am bi en t tem peratu re ran ge
c)
H u m i d i ty ran g e
d)
Al ti tu d e
e)
Speci al en vi ron m en tal con d i ti on s (for exam pl e
corrosi ve atm osph eres, d u st, wet en vi ron m en ts)
f)
Rad i ati on
g)
Vi brati on , sh ock
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 08 –
h)
Speci al i n stal l ati on an d operati on req u i rem en ts (for
exam pl e fl am e-retard an t cabl es an d con d u ctors)
i)
Tran sportati on an d storag e (for exam pl e,
tem peratu res ou tsi d e th e ran ge speci fi ed i n 4. 5)
k)
restri cti on s rel ated to si ze, wei g h t or poi n t l oad
4.
Incoming electrical supplies
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Speci fy for each sou rce of su ppl y:
a)
N om i n al vol tage (V)
AC
DC
I f AC, n u m ber of
ph ases
Freq u en cy (H z)
TN (system wi th
on e poi n t d i rectl y
earth ed , wi th a
protecti ve
con d u ctor (PE)
d i rectl y
con n ected to th at
poi n t); speci fy i f
th e earth ed poi n t
i s th e n eu tral
poi n t (cen tre of
th e star) or
an oth er poi n t
TT (system wi th
on e poi n t d i rectl y
earth ed bu t th e
protecti ve
con d u ctor (PE) of
th e m ach i n e n ot
con n ected to th at
earth poi n t of th e
system )
Val u e of th e su ppl y sou rce i mped an ce ( Ω ) at th e poi n t
of con n ecti on to th e el ectrical eq u i pm en t
Prospecti ve sh ort-ci rcu i t cu rren t (kA r. m . s. ) at th e poi n t
of con n ecti on to th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t (see al so
i tem 2)
b)
Type of d i stri bu ti on system (see I EC 60364-1 )
I T (system th at i s
n ot d i rectl y
earth ed )
I n th e case of I T system s, i s i n su l ati on m on i tori n g /fau l t
l ocati on to be provi d ed by th e su ppl i er of th e el ectri cal
eq u i pm en t?
Yes
No
c)
Yes
No
I s d iscon n ecti on of th e n eu tral (N ) con d u ctor req u i red ?
Yes
No
I s a rem ovabl e l in k for d i scon n ecti n g th e n eu tral (N )
req u i red ?
Yes
No
Yes/N o
I f yes, type an d
rated resi d u al
operati n g cu rren t
I s th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t to be con n ected to a
n eu tral (N ) su ppl y con d u ctor? (See 5. 1 )
M axi m u m cu rren t (A) al l owed
d)
Su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g d evi ce
Type of su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g d evi ce to be provi d ed
e)
Cross secti on al area an d m ateri al of extern al
protecti ve (PE ) con d u ctor
f)
I s an RCD provi d ed i n th e i n stal l ati on ?
5.
Protection against electric shock (see Clause 6)
a)
For wh i ch of th e fol l owi n g cl asses of person s i s
access to th e i n teri or of en cl osu res req u i red d u ri n g
n orm al operati on of th e eq u i pm en t?
El ectri cal l y ski l l ed
person s
El ectri cal l y
i n stru cted person s
b)
Are l ocks wi th rem ovabl e keys to be provi d ed for
secu ri n g th e d oors? (see 6. 2. 2)
Yes
No
Type of l ocki n g d evi ce
Basi c l ock u n i t (except key cyl i n d er) to be su ppl i ed an d
i n stal l ed by
Key cyl i n d er to be su ppl i ed an d i n stal l ed by
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 09 –
6. Protection of equipment (see Clause 7)
a)
Wi l l th e u ser or th e su ppl i er of th e el ectri cal
eq u i pm en t provi d e su ppl y con d u ctors an d th e
overcu rren t protecti on for th e su ppl y con d u ctors?
(see 7. 2 . 2)
Type an d rati n g of overcu rren t protecti ve d evi ces
b)
Larg est (kW) th ree-ph ase AC m otor th at m ay be
started d i rect-on -l i n e
c)
M ay th e n u m ber of m otor overl oad d etecti on
d evi ces be red u ced ? (see 7. 3. 2 )
Yes
No
d)
I s overvol tage protecti on to be provi d ed ?
Yes/N o
I f yes, specifi cati on
Start
Stop
7. Operation
For cabl el ess con trol system s, speci fy th e ti me d el ay
before au tom ati c m ach i n e sh u td own i s i n i ti ated i n th e
absen ce of a val i d si g n al .
8. Operator interface and machine-mounted
control devices (see Clause 1 0)
Speci al col ou r preferen ces (for exam pl e to al i g n wi th
exi sti n g m ach i n ery):
Oth er
9. Controlgear
Deg ree of protecti on of en cl osu res (see 1 1 . 3) or speci al
con d i ti on s:
1 0. Wiring practices (see Clause 1 3)
I s th ere a speci fi c m eth od of i d en ti fi cati on to be u sed
for th e con d u ctors? (see 1 3. 2. 1 )
Yes
No
Yes
No
H i g h est
perm i ssi bl e
vol tag e (V)
I f l i gh ti n g ci rcu i t
vol tag e i s n ot
obtai n ed d i rectl y
from th e power
su ppl y, state
preferred vol tag e
Type
1 1 . Accessories and lighting (see Clause 1 5)
a)
I s a parti cu l ar type of socket-ou tl et req u i red ?
I f yes, wh i ch type?
b)
Wh ere th e m ach i n e i s eq u i pped wi th l ocal l i gh ti n g:
1 2. Marking, warnings and reference designations
(see Clause 1 6)
a)
Fu n cti on al i d en ti fi cati on (see 1 6. 3)
Speci fi cati on s:
b)
I n scri pti on s/speci al m arki n gs
On el ectri cal
eq u i pm en t?
I n wh i ch l an g u ag e?
c)
Speci fi c l ocal reg u l ati on s th at m u st be com pl i ed
wi th
Yes
No
On wh at m ed i a/
I n wh i ch l an g u ag e?
I f yes, wh i ch on e?
1 3. Technical documentation (see Clause 1 7)
a)
Tech n i cal d ocu m en tati on (see 1 7. 1 )
Fi l e format?
b)
I n stru cti on s for u se (see 1 7. 1 )
On wh at m ed i a?
Fi l e format?
I n wh i ch l an g u ag e?
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 110 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
c)
Si ze, l ocati on an d pu rpose of d u cts, open cabl e
trays or cabl e su pports to be provi d ed by th e u ser
d)
I n d i cate i f speci al l i m i tati on s on th e si ze or wei g h t
affect th e tran sport of a parti cu l ar m ach i n e or
con trol gear assem bl i es to th e i n stal l ati on si te:
M axi m u m
d i m en si on s
M axi m u m wei gh t
e)
I n th e case of speci al l y bu il t mach i n es, i s a
certi fi cate of operati n g tests wi th th e l oad ed
m ach i n e to be su ppl i ed ?
Yes
No
f)
I n th e case of oth er m ach i n es, i s a certi fi cate of
operati n g type tests on a l oad ed prototype
m ach i n e to be su ppl i ed ?
Yes
No
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 111 –
Annex C
(informative)
Examples of machines covered by this part of IEC 60204
The foll owing l ist shows exampl es of machines whose electrical eq uipmen t shou ld con form to
th is part of I EC 60204. The list is not in ten d ed to be exh austive bu t is consisten t with the
d efinition of mach in ery (3. 1 . 40). Th is part of I EC 60204 need n ot be appl ied to mach in es that
are h ousehold and similar d omestic appliances with in the scope of the I EC 60335 series of
stand ards.
M etalworking machinery
Food machin ery
•
metal cutting machines
•
d ough breaks
•
metal forming machines
•
mixin g machines
•
pie and tart mach in es
•
meat processing machines
Pl astics and rubber mach in ery
Printing, paper an d board machinery
•
in jection mou ld in g mach in es
•
prin ting mach ines
•
extrusion machines
•
fin ish ing mach ines, gu illotin es, folders
•
blow moul din g machines
•
reeling and slittin g machines
•
th ermoset moul ding mach in es
•
fold er box glu in g mach ines
•
size red uction machines
•
paper and board making mach in es
Wood mach in ery
I nspecting/testin g mach in ery
•
woodworking machines
•
co-ord in ate measuring machin es
•
l aminating mach in es
•
in-process gauging machin es
•
sawmil l mach in es
Assembly machines
Compressors
M aterial h and l ing machines
Packaging mach in ery
•
robots
•
palletizers/d epalletizers
•
con veyors
•
•
transfer mach in es
wrappin g
machin es
•
storage an d retrieval mach in es
an d
shrink-wrapping
Textile mach in es
Laund ry mach ines
Refrigeration and air-cond itioning machines
H eating and ventilatin g mach in es
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 112 –
Leath er/imitation
leath er
footwear mach in ery
good s
and
Construction
mach in ery
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
and
bu ild ing
•
cu ttin g an d punch in g machines
•
tu nnelling machines
•
roughing, scouring, bu ffin g, trimming an d
brush ing mach ines
•
concrete batchin g mach in es
footwear mou ld in g mach in es
•
•
brick-making machines
l asting machines
•
•
stone,
ceramic
mach in es
H oisting mach in ery (see I EC 60204-32)
and
cranes
•
wood working machines
•
h oists
•
metal working machines
M ach inery for transportation of persons
gl ass-making
Transportable machinery
•
M obile machinery
•
escal ators
•
liftin g platforms
•
ropeways for transportation of persons,
for example ch airlifts, ski l ifts
•
fork l ift trucks
passen ger l ifts
•
•
construction machin es
Power-operated d oors
M achin es for h ot metal processing
Leisure mach inery
Tanning mach in ery
•
fairgrou nd an d amusemen t rid es
Pu mps
Agricu lture an d forestry mach in es
•
mu lti-roll er mach in es
•
band knife machines
•
h ydraul ic tan ning mach in es
M ining and q uarrying machines
materials
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 113 –
Annex D
(informative)
Current-carrying capacity and overcurrent protection of
conductors and cables in the electrical equipment of machines
D.1
General
The pu rpose of this An nex A is to provid e ad d itional in formation on the selection of cond uctor
sizes where th e cond itions given for Table 6 (see Cl ause 1 2) have to be mod ified (see n otes
to Tabl e 6).
D.2
General operating conditions
D.2.1
Ambient air temperature
The curren t carrying capacity for PVC insul ated conductors given in Table 6 is rel ated to an
ambient air temperature of + 40 °C. For other ambien t air temperatures, th e correction factors
are given in Table D. 1 .
The correction factors for rubber insul ated cables are given by th e manu facturer.
Table D.1 – Correction factors
Ambient air temperature
Correction factor
°C
40
1 , 00
45
0, 91
50
0, 82
55
0, 71
60
0, 58
N OTE Th e correcti on factors are d eri ved from I EC 60364-5-52 .
Th e m axi m u m tem peratu re u n d er n orm al con d i ti on s for PVC 70 ° C.
D.2.2
Methods of installation
I n mach in es, the method s of cond uctor and cable instal lation between enclosures an d
ind ividu al items of the equ ipment shown in Figu re D. 1 are assumed to be typical (th e letters
used are in accord ance with I EC 60364-5-52):
–
–
–
–
M ethod B1 : usin g con d uits (3. 1 . 9) and cable trunkin g systems (3. 1 . 6) for hold in g an d
protectin g cond uctors or single core cabl es;
M ethod B2: same as B1 bu t used for mu l ticore cables;
M ethod C: mul ticore cables instal led in free air, horizon tal or vertical with ou t gap
between cabl es on walls;
M ethod E: mul ticore cables in free air, horizon tal or vertical l aid on open cable trays
(3. 1 . 5).
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 114 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
B1
IEC
a) Con d u ctors/si n gl e core cabl es i n con du i t an d cabl e tru n ki n g systems
B2
IEC
b) Cabl es i n con d u i t an d cabl e tru n ki n g sys tems
C
IEC
c) Cabl es on wal l s
≥ 0, 3 D e
E
≥ 0, 3 D e
IEC
d ) Cabl es on open cabl e trays
Figu re D.1 – Methods of conductor and cable installation
independent of nu mber of conductors/cables
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
D.2.3
– 115 –
Grouping
Wh ere more l oad ed cond uctors in cabl es or cond uctor pairs are instal led , d erate the valu es of
Iz , given in Table 6 or by th e manu facturer in accord ance with Tabl es D. 2 or D. 3.
N OTE
Ci rcu i ts wi th
Ib
< 30 % of Iz n eed n ot be d erated .
Table D.2 – Derating factors for Iz for grouping
M eth od s of i n stal l ati on (see Fi g u re D. 1 ) (see N ote 3)
N u m ber of l oad ed ci rcui ts/cabl es
2
4
6
9
B1
(con d u ctors or si n g l e core cabl es) an d B2
(m u l ti core cabl es)
0, 80
0, 65
0, 57
0, 50
C
si n g l e l ayer wi th n o gap between cabl es
0, 85
0, 75
0, 72
0, 70
E
si n g l e l ayer on on e perforated tray wi th ou t g ap
between cabl es
0, 88
0, 77
0, 73
0, 72
E
as before bu t wi th 2 to 3 trays, wi th a verti cal
spaci n g between each tray of 300 m m (see N ote 4)
0, 86
0, 76
0, 71
0, 66
0, 76
0, 57
0, 48
0, 40
Con trol ci rcu i t pai rs < 0, 5mm 2 i n d epen d en t of m eth od s of
i n stal l ati on
N OTE 1
Th ese factors are appl i cabl e to
–
cabl es, al l eq u al l y l oad ed , th e ci rcu i t i tsel f sym m etri cal l y l oad ed ;
–
g rou ps of ci rcu i ts of i n su l ated con d u ctors or cabl es h avi n g th e sam e al l owabl e maxi m u m operati n g tem peratu re.
N OTE 2
Th e sam e factors are appl i ed to
–
g rou ps of two or th ree si n gl e-core cabl es;
–
m u l ti core cabl es.
N OTE 3 Factors d eri ved from I EC 60364-5-52: 2009.
N OTE 4 A perforated cabl e tray i s a tray wh ere th e h ol es occu py m ore th an 30 % of th e area of th e base.
(Deri ved from I EC 60364-5-52: 2009).
Table D.3 – Derating factors for Iz for mu lticore cables up to 1 0 mm 2
N u m ber of l oad ed con du ctors
or pai rs
Con d u ctors ( ≥ 1 m m 2 )
(see N ote 3)
Pai rs
(0, 25 m m 2 to 0, 75 mm 2 )
1
–
1 ,0
3
1 ,0
0, 5
5
0, 75
0, 39
7
0, 65
0, 34
N OTE 1
10
0, 55
0, 29
24
0, 40
0, 21
Appl i cabl e to m u l ti core cabl es wi th eq u al l y l oad ed con d u ctors/pai rs.
N OTE 2 For grou pi n g of m u l ti core cabl es, see d erati n g factors of Tabl e D. 2.
N OTE 3 Factors d eri ved from I EC 60364-5-52: 2009.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 116 –
D.2.4
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Classification of condu ctors
Table D.4 – Classification of condu ctors
Cl ass
U se/appl i cati on
1
Sol i d copper or al u m i n i u m con d u ctors
2
Stran d ed copper or al u mi n i u m con d u ctors
5
Fl exi bl e stran d ed copper con d u ctors
6
Fl exi bl e stran d ed copper con d u ctors con d u ctors
th at are m ore fl exi bl e th an cl ass 5
N OTE
D.3
Descri pti on
Fi xed i n stal l ati on s
M ach i n e i n stal l ati on s wi th presen ce of vi brati on ;
con n ecti on to m ovi n g parts
For freq u en t movem en ts
Deri ved from I EC 60228.
Co-ordination between conductors and protective devices providing
overload protection
Figure D. 2 illustrates th e relationship between th e parameters of conductors and th e
parameters of protective d evices provid ing overload protection .
Desi g n cu rren t
Ib
Cu rren t carryi n g capaci ty
Iz
1 , 45 ×
Iz
Param eters of
con d u ctors
IA
Acceptabl e ran g e for
tri ppi n g cu rren t I2
Param eters of
protecti ve d evi ces
N om i n al cu rren t or
cu rren t setti n g In
IEC
Figure D.2 – Parameters of conductors and protective devices
Correct protection of a cabl e req u ires th at the operating characteristics of a protective d evice
(for example overcurren t protective d evice, motor overl oad protective device) protecting the
cabl e against overload satisfy th e two fol lowing cond itions:
Ib
I2
≤
In
≤
Iz
≤ 1 , 45 × Iz
where
Ib is the current for which th e circuit is d esigned ;
IZ is the effective curren t-carrying capacity, in amperes, of the cabl e for con tinuous service
accord in g to Table 6 for th e particul ar instal lation cond itions:
– temperature, d eratin g of IZ see Table D. 1 ;
– grouping, d erating of IZ see Table D. 2;
– mu l ticore cables, d erating of IZ see Tabl e D. 3.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
In
is the nominal cu rren t of th e protective d evice;
N OTE 1
I2
– 117 –
For ad j u stabl e protecti ve d evi ces, th e n omi n al cu rren t In i s th e cu rren t setti n g sel ected .
is the min imum current ensuring effective operation of th e protective d evice with in a
specified time (for exampl e 1 h for protective devices up to 63 A).
The curren t I2 ensu ring effective operation of th e protective device is given in the prod uct
standard or may be provided by th e man u facturer.
N OTE 2 For m otor ci rcu i t con d u ctors, overl oad protecti on for con d u ctor(s) can be provi d ed by th e overl oad
protecti on for th e m otor(s) wh ereas th e sh ort-ci rcu i t protecti on i s provi d ed by sh ort-ci rcu i t protecti ve d evi ces.
Wh ere a d evi ce th at provi d es both overl oad an d sh ort-ci rcu i t protecti on i s u sed i n accord an ce wi th Cl au se D. 3 for
con d u ctor overl oad protecti on , i t d oes n ot en su re com pl ete protecti on i n al l cases (for exam pl e overl oad wi th
cu rren ts l ess th an I2 ), n or wi l l i t n ecessari l y resu l t i n an econ om i cal sol u ti on . Th erefore, su ch a d evi ce can be
u n su i tabl e wh ere overl oad s wi th cu rren ts l ess th an I2 are l i kel y to occu r.
D.4
Overcurrent protection of conductors
Al l cond uctors are requ ired to be protected against overcurren t (see 7. 2) by protective
d evices inserted in al l live cond uctors so that any short-circuit current flowing in the cabl e is
interrupted before th e con d uctor has reach ed the maximu m al lowable temperature.
N OTE
I n formati on on n eu tral con d u ctors can be fou n d i n 7. 2 . 3, th i rd parag raph .
Table D.5 – Maximum allowable conductor temperatures
under normal and short-circuit conditions
Type of i n sul ati on
M axi m um temperature u nder
n ormal con di ti on s
U l ti mate sh ort-ti me condu ctor
tem perature under sh ort-circu i t
condi ti on s a)
°C
°C
Pol yvi n yl ch l ori d e (PVC)
70
1 60
Ru bber
60
200
Cross-l i n ked pol yeth yl en e (XLPE)
90
250
Eth yl en e propyl en e com pou n d
(EPR)
90
250
Si l i con e ru bber (Si R)
1 80
350
N OTE For u l ti m ate sh ort-ti me con d u ctor tem peratu res g reater th an 200 ° C, n ei th er ti n n ed n or bare copper
con d u ctors are su i tabl e. Si l ver-pl ated or n ickel -pl ated copper con d u ctors are su i tabl e for u se above 200 ° C.
a)
Th ese val u es are based on th e assu mpti on of ad i abati c beh avi ou r for a peri od of n ot more th an 5 s.
I n practice, th e req uirements of 7. 2 are fu lfil led when the protective d evice at a curren t I
causes th e in terru ption of the circu it with in a time that in no case exceeds the time t where
t < 5 s.
The value of the time t in second s can be calcu lated using the fol lowing formu la:
t
= (k ×
S/ I) 2
wh ere:
S is the cross-sectional area in squ are millimetres;
I
is the effective short-circu it curren t in amperes expressed for AC as th e r. m. s. value;
k is the factor shown for copper con d uctors when insulated with the fol lowin g material :
PVC
115
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 118 –
Ru bber
SiR
XLPE
EPR
D.5
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
1 41
1 32
1 43
1 43
Effect of harmonic currents on balanced three-phase systems
I n case of circu its feeding single phase load s with load cu rren t includ in g h armon ics, the
n eu tral cond uctor of the circuit migh t be add ition all y load ed and a red uction of the curren t
carrying capacity of that cable migh t be necessary. For reference see I EC 60364-5-52: 2009,
An nex E.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 119 –
Annex E
(informative)
Explanation of emergency operation functions
N OTE Th e con cepts bel ow are i n cl u d ed h ere to g i ve th e read er an u n d erstan d i n g of th ese terms even th ou g h i n
th i s part of I E C 60204 on l y two of th em are u sed .
•
Emergency operation
Emergency operation includ es separatel y or in combin ation :
– emergency stop;
– emergency start;
– emergency switch ing off;
– emergency switch ing on.
•
Emergency stop
An emergency operation in ten ded to stop a process or a movement th at h as become
h azardous.
•
Emergency start
An emergency operation in tend ed to start a process or a movemen t to remove or to avoid
a hazardous situation.
•
Emergency switching off
An emergency operation in tend ed to switch off th e su ppl y of electrical en ergy to al l or a
part of an installation wh ere a risk of electric sh ock or anoth er risk of electrical origin is
in vol ved .
•
Emergency switching on
An emergency operation in tend ed to switch on the suppl y of electrical en ergy to a part of
an install ation that is in ten d ed to be used for emergency situations
.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 20 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Annex F
(informative)
Guide for the use of this part of IEC 60204
This part of I EC 60204 gives a large n umber of general req uiremen ts that may or may n ot be
applicable to th e electrical eq uipmen t of a particu lar machin e. A simpl e reference withou t any
q ualification to the complete stan dard I EC 60204-1 is therefore not sufficient. Choices need to
be made to cover all requ iremen ts of this part of I EC 60204. A tech nical committee preparin g
a prod uct famil y or a ded icated product stand ard (type C in I SO and CEN ), and th e su pplier of
a mach in e for which no product famil y or d edicated prod uct stand ard exists, should use this
part of I EC 60204:
a) by reference; and
b) by selection of the most appropriate option(s) from the requiremen ts given in the relevan t
clauses; an d
c) by mod ification of certain cl auses, as n ecessary, wh ere the particul ar requ irements for the
equ ipmen t of the machine are ad equatel y covered by oth er relevant stan dard s,
provid ing the options selected an d the modifications mad e do not ad versel y affect the level of
protection req uired for that mach ine accord in g to th e risk assessmen t.
When appl yin g the three principles a), b) and c) listed above, it is recommended that:
–
reference be mad e to the rel evant clauses an d subclauses of th is stand ard:
•
that are complied with , ind icatin g where relevan t th e appl icable option ;
that have been mod ified or extend ed for th e specific machine or equ ipmen t
requ iremen ts; and
reference be mad e d irectly to the relevan t standard , for th ose req uirements for the
electrical equ ipmen t that are adeq uatel y covered by that stand ard .
•
–
Specific expertise can be necessary to:
–
–
–
–
–
perform the n ecessary risk assessmen t of th e machine;
read and und erstand al l of the requiremen ts of this part of I EC 60204;
ch oose the applicable requ irements from this part of I EC 60204 where al tern atives are
given ;
iden tify alternative or ad d itional particu lar req uiremen ts th at differ from or are n ot incl ud ed
in the req uirements of this part of I EC 60204, and that are determin ed by th e machin e and
its use; and
specify precisel y th ose particular requ irements.
Figure 1 of th is part of I EC 60204 is a bl ock d iagram of a typical mach ine and can be used as
th e starting poin t of th is task. I t ind icates the Clauses an d Subclauses d eal ing with particul ar
requiremen ts/equ ipmen t. H owever, th is part of I EC 60204 is a complex d ocumen t and
Table F. 1 can help id en tify th e appl ication options for a particu lar mach ine an d gives
reference to other relevan t stand ard s.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 21 –
Table F.1 – Application options
Su bj ect
Clau se or
Su bcl au se
Scope
1
G en eral req u i remen ts
4
Sel ecti on of eq u i pm en t
4. 2. 2
Su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g (i sol ati n g ) d evi ce
i)
ii)
X
X
X
I SO 1 2 1 00
X
X
I EC 61 439 seri es
X
I SO 1 2 1 00
X
5. 3. 5
X
5. 4, 5. 5
an d 5. 6
X
6
X
Em erg en cy operati on s
9. 2. 3. 4
X
Two-h an d con trol
9. 2. 3. 8
X
X
Cabl el ess con trol
9. 2. 4
X
X
Preven ti on of u n expected start-u p,
i sol ation
Protecti on ag ai n st el ectri c sh ock
i v)
X
5. 3
Excepted ci rcu i ts
iii )
X
X
I SO 1 41 1 8
I EC 60364-4-41
X
I SO 1 3850
I SO 1 3851
X
Con trol fu n cti on s i n th e even t of fai l u re
I EC 62745
I SO 1 2 1 00
9. 4
X
X
X
I SO 1 3849 (al l parts)
I EC 62061
Posi ti on sen sors
1 0. 1 . 4
X
X
Col ou rs an d marki n gs of operator
i n terface d evi ces
1 0. 2 , 1 0. 3
an d 1 0. 4
X
X
Em erg en cy stop
9. 2 . 3. 4. 2
X
Em erg en cy stop d evi ces
1 0. 7
X
X
I EC 60947-5-5
Em erg en cy swi tch i n g off d evices
1 0. 8
X
X
I EC 60364-5-53
Con trol g ear – protecti on ag ai n st
i n g ress of con tam i n an ts, etc.
1 0. 1 . 3 an d
1 1 .3
X
X
1 3. 2
X
X
18
X
X
X
X
X
I d en ti fi cati on of con d u ctors
Veri fi cati on
Ad d i ti on al u ser req u i rem en ts
An n ex B
Fau l t protecti on i n TN systems
An n ex A
(A. 1 )
X
An n ex A
(A. 2)
X
Fau l t protecti on i n TT systems
X
I SO 1 41 1 9
I EC 60073
I EC 61 31 0 (al l parts)
I SO 1 3850
X
I EC 6052 9
I EC 62491
I EC 60364-6
I EC 60364-4-41
I EC 60364-6
I EC 60364-4-41
I EC 60364-6
Cl au ses an d Su bcl au ses of th i s part of I EC 602 04 wh ere acti on sh ou l d be con si d ered (sh own by X) wi th respect
to:
i)
sel ecti on from th e m easu res gi ven ;
i i ) ad d iti on al req u i rem en ts;
i i i ) d i fferen t req ui rem en ts;
i v) exam pl es of oth er stan d ard s th at can be rel evan t.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 22 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Annex G
(informative)
Comparison of typical conductor cross-sectional areas
Table G. 1 provid es a comparison of th e cond uctor cross-section al areas of th e American Wire
Gauge (AWG) with square mill imetres, sq uare inches, an d circul ar mils.
Table G.1 – Comparison of conductor sizes
Wire size
Gauge No
mm2
(AWG )
0, 2
24
0, 3
22
0, 5
20
0, 75
18
1 ,0
16
1 ,5
14
2, 5
12
4
10
6
8
10
6
16
4
25
2
35
1
50
Cross-sectional area
DC resistance
of copper at
20 ºC
Circular mils
mm2
i n ch es 2
Oh m s per km
0, 1 96
0, 000 304
91 , 62
387
0, 205
0, 000 31 7
87, 60
404
0, 283
0, 000 438
63, 46
558
0, 324
0, 000 504
55, 44
640
0, 500
0, 000 775
36, 70
987
0, 51 9
0, 000 802
34, 45
1 020
0, 750
0, 001 1 62
2 4, 80
1 480
0, 823
0, 001 272
2 0, 95
1 620
1 , 000
0, 001 550
1 8, 20
1 973
1 , 31
0, 002 026
1 3, 1 9
2 580
1 , 500
0, 002 325
1 2, 20
2 960
2 , 08
0, 003 228
8, 442
4 110
2 , 500
0, 003 875
7, 56
4 934
3, 31
0, 005 1 29
5, 31 5
6 530
4, 000
0, 006 200
4, 700
7 894
5, 26
0, 008 1 52
3, 335
1 0 380
6, 000
0, 009 300
3, 1 1 0
1 1 841
8, 37
0, 01 2 967
2 , 093
1 6 51 0
1 0, 000
0, 001 550
1 , 840
1 9 735
1 3, 3
0, 020 61 0
1 , 320
26 240
1 6, 000
0, 024 800
1 , 1 60
31 576
21 ,1
0, 032 780
0, 829 5
41 740
25, 000
0, 038 800
0, 734 0
49 338
33, 6
0, 052 1 00
0, 521 1
66 360
35, 000
0, 054 200
0, 529 0
69 073
42, 4
0, 065 700
0, 41 3 9
83 690
47, 000
0, 072 800
0, 391 0
92 756
The resistance for temperatures other th an 20°C can be found using th e formu la:
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 23 –
R = R1 [1 + 0, 003 93 ( t – 20)]
where:
R1 is the resistance at 20 °C;
R is the resistance at a temperature t°C.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 24 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Annex H
(informative)
Measures to reduce the effects of electromagnetic influences
H.1
Definitions
For th e purposes of Annex H on ly, the followin g terms and d efinitions apply.
H.1 .1
apparatus
fin ished d evice or combination thereof mad e commercially available as a single fu nctional
u nit, in ten d ed for th e end user and l iable to generate electromagn etic d istu rbance, or the
performance of which is liable to be affected by such d isturbance
H.1 .2
fixed installation
particu lar combination of several types of apparatus and , wh ere appl icabl e, other d evices,
wh ich are assembled , installed and intended to be used perman en tly at a pred efined location
H.2
General
This An nex H provides recommend ations to improve electromagnetic immu nity and red uce
emission of electromagnetic d istu rbances.
For EM C purposes, electrical equ ipmen t for mach in ery is deemed to be eith er apparatus or
fixed instal lations. Where electrical safety an d electromagn etic compatibility resul t in d ifferen t
requiremen ts, electrical safety always h as the higher priority.
El ectromagnetic I n terference (EM I ) can d istu rb or d amage process mon itoring, con trol and
au tomation systems. Currents d ue to l igh tning, switch ing operations, short-circu its an d oth er
electromagnetic phen omena can cause overvol tages an d electromagnetic in terference.
These effects can occur for example:
•
wh ere large cond uctive loops exist,
•
wh ere d ifferen t electrical wirin g systems are instal led in common rou tes, e. g. power
su ppl y, communication , con trol or signal cables.
Cables carrying large cu rren ts with a h igh rate of change of current (d i/d t) can in duce
overvol tages in other cables, wh ich can influ ence or d amage th e connected electrical
equipmen t.
H.3
H.3.1
Mitigation of electromagnetic interference (EMI)
General
Consideration shou ld be given , in th e d esign of the electrical eq uipment to the measures
d escribed below for reducin g the electromagnetic in fluences on electrical eq uipmen t.
Onl y el ectrical equ ipment wh ich meets th e requ iremen ts of the appropriate EMC standard s, or
th e EM C requ iremen ts of th e relevan t prod uct stand ard , should be used .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
H.3.2
– 1 25 –
Measures to reduce EMI
The fol lowing measures reduce electromagnetic in terference:
a) The install ation of surge protection d evices an d /or filters for equ ipment sensitive to
electromagnetic in fl uences is recommen ded to improve electromagnetic compatibil ity with
regard to con ducted electromagnetic phen omena;
b) Conductive sheaths (e. g. armouring, screens) of cables shoul d be bond ed to the
protective bond ing circuit;
c) I n d uctive l oops shoul d be avoid ed by selection of common rou tes for power, signal an d
d ata circu its wiring while maintain in g circu it separation in accord ance with Clause H . 4;
d ) Power cables sh ou ld be kept separate from signal or d ata cabl es;
e) Wh ere it is n ecessary for power and sign al or d ata cables to cross each oth er they shou l d
be crossed at righ t-angles;
f) U se of cables with concen tric con d uctors to red uce currents in d uced in to th e protective
conductor;
g) U se of symmetrical mu lticore cables (e. g. screen ed cables con taining separate protective
conductors) for the electrical con nections between motors and con verters;
h) U se of signal an d d ata cabl es accord ing to the EM C requ iremen ts of th e man u factu rer’s
instructions;
i) Wh ere screened signal or data cables are used , care shou ld be taken to red uce curren t
fl owing through the screens of signal cabl es, or d ata cables, which are earthed . I t can be
n ecessary to instal l a by-pass cond uctor; see Figure H . 1 ;
I
By-pass con d u ctor for screen rei n forcem en t
IEC
Figure H.1 – By-pass conductor for screen reinforcement
N OTE
A g ood eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g of th e com pon en ts of th e m ach i n e red u ces th e n eed for by-pass con d u ctors.
j)
Eq uipoten tial bond in g connections sh ou ld have an impedance as low as practicabl e by
being as short as practicabl e an d wh ere appl icable braid ed to cond uct higher frequ encies;
k) I f electron ic equ ipment requ ires a reference voltage at abou t earth poten tial in ord er to
fu nction correctl y; th is reference vol tage is provid ed by the fu nctional earth ing conductor.
For equ ipmen t operating at high frequencies, th e connections sh all be kept as short as
practicable.
H.4
Separation and segregation of cables
Power cables an d d ata cabl es which sh are th e same rou te shou ld be instal led accord ing to
th e requ iremen ts of th is Annex H .
Wh ere no oth er in formation is availabl e, then th e cable separation d istance between the
power and d ata cables sh ou ld be in accord ance with Table H . 1 and Figure H . 2.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 26 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Table H.1 – Minimum separation distances using
metallic containment as illustrated in Figure H.2
Separation wi thout
metal lic contai nment
A
B
C
Mesh metalli c
contai nment
Perforated metalli c
containment
Soli d metallic
containment
IEC
≥ 2 00 m m
≥ 1 50 m m
IEC
IEC
≥ 1 00 m m
0 mm
A S creen i n g perform an ce (DC-1 00 M H z) eq u i val en t to wel d ed m esh steel basket of m esh si ze
50 m m × 1 00 mm (excl u d i n g l ad d ers). Th is screen i n g perform an ce i s al so ach i eved wi th steel tray even i f th e
wal l th i ckn ess i s l ess th an 1 mm an d /or th e even l y d i stri bu ted perforated area i s g reater th an 20 % .
B S creen i n g perform an ce (DC-1 00 M H z) eq u i val en t to steel tray of at l east 1 m m wal l th i ckn ess an d n o m ore
th an 20 % even l y d i stri bu ted perforated area. Th i s screen i n g perform an ce i s al so ach i eved wi th screen ed
power cabl es.
N o part of th e cabl e wi th i n th e m etal l i c con tai n m en t sh ou l d be l ess th an 1 0 m m bel ow th e top of th e m etal l i c
con tai n m en t.
C S creen i n g perform an ce (DC-1 00 M H z) eq u i val en t to a steel con d u i t of at l east 1 m m wal l th i ckn ess.
Separati on speci fi ed i s i n ad d i ti on to th at provi d ed by an y d i vi d er/screen .
The min imum separation requiremen t specified in Tabl e H . 1 appl ies to the horizon tal or
vertical separation between ad jacen t cable trays or cable trunkin g systems. Wh ere data
cabl es and power supply cables are required to cross and required minimu m separation
cannot be main tained then the angl e of their crossing sh ou ld be main tained at 90 d egrees on
either sid e of the crossing for a d istance no less than the applicable minimum separation
requiremen t.
Figures H . 2 and H . 3 show examples of separation and segregation .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 27 –
IEC
For d i stan ces see Tabl e H . 1 .
= power su ppl y cabl i n g
= au xi l i ary ci rcu i ts
= d ata cabl i n g
= sen si ti ve ci rcu i ts (e. g . m easu rem en t)
Figu re H .2 – Examples of vertical separation and segregation
IEC
For d i stan ces see Tabl e H . 1 .
Figure H .3 – Examples of horizontal separation and segregation
U sabl e space within the cable tray or cabl e tru nking system sh ould al low for an agreed
q uan tity of ad ditional cables to be installed (see An nex B). Th e cable bun dl e heigh t sh ould be
lower than th e sid e-walls of the cabl e tray or cable trunkin g system , as sh own in Figure H . 4
bel ow. The overlapping lid of cable trunkin g systems improves the electromagnetic
compatibil ity performance.
For a U -shape cable tray, th e magnetic field d ecreases near the two corn ers. For th is reason ,
d eep sid e-wal ls are preferred .
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 28 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Sh ad i n g i n d i cates
screen i n g perform an ce
Sh ad i n g i n d i cates
screen i n g perform an ce
N ot recom m en d ed
N ot recom m en d ed
Recomm en d ed
Recomm en d ed
IEC
Figu re H .4 – Cable arrangements in metal cable trays
M etal cable trays or cable trunkin g systems wh ich are in tended to provid e electromagnetic
compatibil ity sh all always be connected to th e l ocal equipoten tial bond in g system at both
end s. For l ong d istances, for example greater than 50 m, ad d ition al connections to th e
equ ipotential bon ding system are recommend ed . Al l conn ections to the eq uipotential bond in g
system shoul d have low imped ance.
Wh ere metal cable trays or cable trunking systems are constructed from several elemen ts,
care sh ou ld be taken to ensure con tinuity by effective bond ing between ad jacen t elemen ts.
The sh ape of th e metal lic section should ach ieve con tinu ity of sh ield in g th rou ghou t its length.
All in tercon nections should h ave low impedance; see Figure H . 5.
a
N on -con form an t
IEC
b
Con form an t
IEC
c
Recomm en d ed
IEC
Figu re H .5 – Connections between metal cable trays or cable tru nking systems
Wh ere metal l ic covers for metall ic cable tru nking systems are used , a cover over the full
l en gth is preferred . I f that is n ot possible, the covers sh ould be connected to the cable tray at
l east at both end s by short connections l ess than 1 0 cm, e. g. braid ed or mesh straps.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 29 –
Figure H . 6 shows a metal cabl e tray crossing a wal l at which a fire barrier is to be installed .
Wh ere metal cable trays are req u ired to be interrupted to pass through bu ild ing structures, a
low imped ance in tercon nection should be provid ed between the two metal lic sections.
Regulations with respect to fire barriers take precedence over EMC consid erations.
A
N on -con form an t
B
Con form an t
IEC
Figure H.6 – Interruption of metal cable trays at fire barriers
H.5
Power supply of a machine by parallel sources
Wh ere a mach in e is supplied with power by parallel sou rces, see I EC 60364-1 .
H.6
Supply impedance where a Power Drive System (PDS) is used
Connection of a PDS to too high a su ppl y source impedance can lead to cond ucted emission
problems.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 30 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Annex I
(informative)
Documentation / Information
A list of available stand ard s appl icabl e to d ocumen tation and in formation is provid ed in
Table I . 1 .
Brief d efinitions of a set of in ternation al ly stand ard ized docu men t kin d s are given in the
publicl y available d atabase I EC 61 355 DB (h ttp: //std . iec. ch/iec61 355).
Table I.1 – Documentation / Information that can be applicable
Type of information for the electrical
equipment
Stru ctu ri n g pri n ci pl es
Stru ctu ri n g of d ocu m en ts
Parts l i st
Li st of d ocu m en ts
Speci fi cati on of th e properti es of th e el ectri cal
eq u i pm en t
I n stru cti on s for h an d l i n g , tran sportati on an d
storage
I n stru cti on s for i n stal l ati on , erecti on , assem bl i n g
on si te, d i sm an tl i n g , etc.
I n stru cti on s for u se
I n stru cti on s for servi ce an d mai n ten an ce
Referen ce d esi g n ati on s
Recommended standard
I EC 81 346-1 : Industrial systems, installations and
equipment and industrial products – Structuring principles
and reference designations – Part 1: Basic rules
I EC 62023: Structuring of technical information and
documentation (see n ote)
I EC 62027: Preparation of object lists, including parts lists
I EC 62027: Preparation of object lists, including parts lists
I E C PAS 62569-1 : Generic specification of information on
products – Part 1: Principles and methods
I EC 82079-1 : Preparation of instructions for use –
Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General
principles and detailed requirements
I EC 82079-1 : Preparation of instructions for use –
Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General
principles and detailed requirements
I EC 82079-1 : Preparation of instructions for use –
Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General
principles and detailed requirements
I EC 82079-1 : Preparation of instructions for use –
Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General
principles and detailed requirements
I EC 81 346-1 : Industrial systems, installations and
equipment and industrial products – Structuring principles
and reference designations – Part 1: Basic rules
an d
Spare parts l i st for a speci fi ed peri od
I EC 81 346-2 : Industrial systems, installations and
equipment and industrial products – Structuring principles
and reference designations – Part 2: Classification of
objects and codes for classes
I EC 61 666: Industrial systems, installations and equipment
and industrial products – Identification of terminals within a
system
I EC 62491 : Industrial systems, installations and equipment
and industrial products – Labelling of cables and cores
I EC 61 082 -1 : Preparation of documents used in
electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules
I EC 61 082 -1 : Preparation of documents used in
electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules
I EC 61 082 -1 : Preparation of documents used in
electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules
I EC 62027: Preparation of object lists, including parts lists
Li st of param eters (e. g . of con verters)
(N o stan d ard exi sts)
Term i n al d esi gn ati on s
Desi gn ati on s of cabl es an d cores
Ci rcu it d i ag rams
Layou t of eq u i pm en t an d overal l d i m en si on s
I n tercon n ecti on d i ag ram , term in al l i st, cabl e l i st,
cabl e tray l ayou t
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 31 –
Type of i nformati on for th e el ectri cal
equi pm en t
Li st of tool s
I d en ti fi cati on system s
Recom mended stan dard
Preparation of instructions for use – Structuring,
content and presentation – Part 1: General principles and
detailed requirements
I EC 62507-1 : Identification systems enabling unambiguous
information interchange – Requirements – Part 1: Principles
and methods
I EC 82079:
N OTE For si mpl e eq u i pm en t I EC 62 023 al l ows al l i n form ati on to be con tai n ed wi th i n on e si n g l e d ocu men t.
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 32 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
Bibliography








IEC 60034-5,
Rotating electrical machines – Part 5: Degrees of protection provided by the integral

Rotating electrical machines – Part 11: Thermal protection

IEC standard voltages

design of rotating electrical machines (IP code) – Classifcation
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60034-5.
IEC 60034-1 1 ,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60034-1 1 .
IEC 60038:2009,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60038:2011 (modi f ed).
IEC 60050,
International Electrotechnical Vocabulary (available at <http://www.electropedia.org>)
IEC 60073:2002, Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identifcation –
Coding principles for indicators and actuators
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60073:2002 (not modi f ed).
IEC 60085,
NOTE

Electrical insulation – Thermal evaluation and designation
Harmonized as EN 60085.

IEC 60204-1 1 :2000, Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 11: Requirements
for HV equipment for voltages above 1 000 V a.c. or 1 500 V d.c. and not exceeding 36 kV
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60204-1 1 :2000

Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 31: Particular
safety and EMC requirements for sewing machines, units and systems
IEC 60204-31 :201 3,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60204-31 :201 3 (not modi f ed).

IEC 60204-32:2008, Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 32: Requirements
for hoisting machines
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60204-32:2008 (not modi f ed).

IEC 60204-33:2009, Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 33: Requirements
for semiconductor fabrication equipment


IEC 6021 6 (all parts), Electrical insulating materials – Thermal endurance properties


Conductors of insulated cables


Low-voltage fuses – Part 1: General requirements
 IEC 60287 (all parts), Electric cables – Calculation
 of the current rating
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60204-33:2011 (modi f ed).
NOTE
Harmonized in EN 6021 6 series.
IEC 60228:2004,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60228:2005 (not modi f ed).
IEC 60269-1 :2006,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60269-1 :2007 (not modi f ed).
IEC 60320-1 ,
quirements
Appliance couplers for household and similar general purposes –Part 1: General re-


IEC 60332 (all parts), Tests on electric and optical bre cables under re conditions


IEC 60335 (all parts), Household and similar electrical appliances – Safety


IEC 60364 (all parts), Low-voltage electrical installations


Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identi cation –
Actuating principles


NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60320-1 .
f
NOTE
Harmonized in EN 60332 series.
NOTE
Harmonized in EN 60335 series.
NOTE
Harmonized in HD 60364 series.
IEC 60447:2004,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60447:2004 (not modi f ed).
f
f
BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
– 1 33 –
General requirements for residual current operated protective devices
IEC 60757:1 983, Code for designation of colours
IEC TR 60755,














NOTE
Harmonized as HD 457 S1 :1 985 (not modi f ed).

IEC TR 60890, A method of temperature-rise verifcation of low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
assemblies by calculation
NOTE
Harmonized as CLC/TR 60890.
IEC 60909-0:2001 ,
NOTE

Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems – Part 0: Calculation of currents
Harmonized as EN 60909-0:2001 (not modi f ed).

IEC TR 60909-1 :2002, Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems – Part 1: Factors for the calculation of short-circuit currents according to IEC 60909-0
IEC 60947-1 :2007, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60947-1 :2007 (not modi f ed).

Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4-1: Contactors and motorstarters –
Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters
IEC 60947-4-1 ,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60947-4-1 .

Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5-2: Control circuit devices and
switching elements – Proximity switches
IEC 60947-5-2:2007,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60947-5-2:2007 (not modi f ed).

IEC 60947-5-8, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5-8: Control circuit devices and switching
elements – Three-position enabling switches
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60947-5-8.

IEC 60947-7-1 :2009, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 7-1: Ancillary equipment – Terminal
blocks for copper conductors
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 60947-7-1 :2009 (not modi f ed).

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 5: Installation and mitigation guidelines – Section 2: Earthing and cabling
IEC 61 000-6-1 :2005, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-1: Generic standards: Immunity
for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
IEC 61 000-5-2:1 997,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 61 000-6-1 :2007 (not modi f ed).

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-2: Generic standards – Immunity
for industrial environments
IEC 61 000-6-2:2005,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 61 000-6-2:2005 (not modi f ed).
IEC 61 000-6-3:2006, E lectromagnetic

compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-3: Generic standards – Emission
standard for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 61 000-6-3:2007 (not modi f ed).

IEC 61 000-6-4:1 997, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6: Generic standards – Section 4:
Emission standard for industrial environments
NOTE
IEC 61 082-1 :201 4,
NOTE

Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules

Harmonized as EN 61 000-6-4:2001 2 (modi f ed).
Harmonized as EN 61 082-1 :201 5 (not modi f ed).
IEC 61 084 (all parts), Cable trunking and ducting systems for electrical installations
___________
2
Superseded by EN 61 000-6-4:2007, which is based on IEC 61 000-6-4:2006.

BS EN 60204‑1:2018
– 1 34 –
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6
IEC 61 1 75, Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products –Designation of
signals

IEC 61 1 80 (all parts),

NOTE
Harmonized as EN 61 1 75.


High-voltage test techniques for low-voltage equipment
NOTE Harmonized in EN 61 1 80 series.
IEC TR 61 200-53:1 994, Electrical installation guide – Part 53: Selection and erection of electrical
equipment – Switchgear and controlgear
IEC 61 355, Collection of standardized and established document kinds (available at http://std.iec.ch/
iec61 355)





IEC 61 496-1 :2004, Safety of machinery – Electro-sensitive protective equipment – Part 1: General
requirements and tests
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 61 496-1 :2004 3 (modi f ed).

IEC 61 506, Industrial-process measurement and control – Documentation of application software
IEC 61 557 (all parts), Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1 000 V a. c. and 1500
V d. c. – Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures
NOTE
Harmonized in EN 61 557 series.

IEC 61 558-2-2, Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products – Part 2-2:
Particular requirements and tests for control transformers and power supplies incorporating control
transformers
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 61 558-2-2.

IEC 61 558-2-1 6, Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for supply
voltages up to 1 100 V – Part 2-16: Particular requirements and tests for switch mode power supply
units and transformers for switch mode power supply units
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 61 558-2-1 6.

IEC 61 643-1 2:2008, Low-voltage surge protective devices – Part 12: Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power distribution systems – Selection and application principles
NOTE
Harmonized as CLC/TS 61 643-1 2:2009 (modi f ed).

IEC 61 666, Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Identifcation of
terminals within a system

IEC 61 800 (all parts),

NOTE
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 61 666.

Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
Harmonized in EN 61 800 series.

IEC TR 61 91 2-1 :2007, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Overcurrent protective devices –
Part 1: Application of short-circuit ratings







IEC 62020, Electrical accessories – Residual current monitors for household and similar uses (RCMs)
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 62020.



IEC 62027:201 1 , Preparation of object lists, including parts lists
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 62027:201 2 (not modi f ed).
IEC 62305-1 :201 0, Protection against lightning – Part 1: General principles
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 62305-1 :201 1 (modi f ed).
IEC 62305-4:201 0, Protection against lightning – Part 4: Electrical and electronic systems within structures
NOTE Harmonized as EN 62305-4:2011 (modi f ed).
IEC 62491 , Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Labelling of cables and cores
NOTE Harmonized as EN 62491 .
___________
3

Superseded by EN 61 496-1 :201 3, which is based on IEC 61 496-1 :201 2.

BS EN 60204‑1:2018
I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6


– 1 35 –
IEC 62507-1 , Identifcation systems enabling unambiguous information interchange – Requirements
– Part 1: Principles and methods
NOTE
IEC 62745 ,
4
NOTE

Safety of machinery – Requirements for the interfacing of cableless controllers to machinery

Harmonized as EN 62507-1 .
Harmonized as EN 62745.
IEC PAS 62569-1 , Generic specifcation of information on products – Part 1: Principles and methods
Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Structuring
principles and reference designations – Part 1: Basic rules
IEC 81 346-1 :2009,





NOTE
Harmonized as EN 81 346-1 :2009 (not modi f ed).
IEC 81 346-2:2009,

Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Struc-
turing principles and reference designations – Part 2: Classifcation of objects and codes for classes
NOTE Harmonized as EN 81 346-2:2009 (not modi f ed).

IEC 82079-1 :201 2, Preparation of instructions for use – Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1:
General principles and detailed requirements
NOTE
Harmonized as EN 82079-1 :201 2 (not modi f ed).

Guide for specifying environmental conditions for equipment performance rating
ISO 3864-1 :201 1 , Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Part 1: Design principles for
safety signs and safety markings
ISO 7000:201 4, Graphical symbols for use on equipment – Registered symbols
ISO 1 21 00:201 0, Safety of machinery – General principles for design – Risk assessment and risk
reduction
IEC Guide 1 06:1 996,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN ISO 1 21 00:201 0 (not modi f ed).

Ergonomics of the thermal environment – Methods for the assessment of human responses to contact with surfaces – Part 1:Hot surfaces
ISO 1 3732-1 ,
NOTE
Harmonized as EN ISO 1 3732-1 .
ISO 1 3851 :2002,
principles

Safety of machinery – Two-hand control devices – Functional aspects and design
Safety of machinery – Prevention of unexpected start-up
ISO 1 41 22-1 :2001 , Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery – Part 1: Choice
ISO 1 41 1 8:2000,
of fxed means of access between two levels
ISO 1 41 22-1 :2001 /AMD1 :201 0
ISO 1 41 22-2:2001 , Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery – Part 2: Working platforms and walkways
ISO 1 41 22-2:2001 /AMD1 :201 0
Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery – Part 3: Stairs,
stepladders and guard-rails
ISO 1 41 22-3:2001 ,
ISO 1 41 22-3:2001 /AMD1 :201 0
Guide to use of low-voltage harmonized cables
EN 501 60:201 0, Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public electricity networks
CENELEC HD 51 6 S2,
EN 501 60:201 0/AMD1 :201 5
UL Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Panels, second Edition, 201 3 revised 201 4.
NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery, 201 5 edition.
UL 508A,
___________
___________
4
Under consideration.
NO COPYING WITHOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEPT AS PERMITTED BY COPYRIGHT LAW
British Standards Institution (BSI)
BSI is the national body responsible for preparing British Standards and other
standards-related publications, information and services.
BSI is incorporated by Royal Charter. British Standards and other standardization
products are published by BSI Standards Limited.
About us
Reproducing extracts
We bring together business, industry, government, consumers, innovators
and others to shape their combined experience and expertise into standards
-based solutions.
For permission to reproduce content from BSI publications contact the BSI
Copyright & Licensing team.
The knowledge embodied in our standards has been carefully assembled in
a dependable format and ref ned through our open consultation process.
Organizations of all sizes and across all sectors choose standards to help
them achieve their goals.
Information on standards
We can provide you with the knowledge that your organization needs
to succeed. Find out more about British Standards by visiting our website at
bsigroup.com/standards or contacting our Customer Services team or
Knowledge Centre.
Buying standards
You can buy and download PDF versions of BSI publications, including British
and adopted European and international standards, through our website at
bsigroup.com/shop, where hard copies can also be purchased.
If you need international and foreign standards from other Standards Development
Organizations, hard copies can be ordered from our Customer Services team.
Copyright in BSI publications
All the content in BSI publications, including British Standards, is the property
of and copyrighted by BSI or some person or entity that owns copyright in the
information used (such as the international standardization bodies) and has
formally licensed such information to BSI for commercial publication and use.
Save for the provisions below, you may not transfer, share or disseminate any
portion of the standard to any other person. You may not adapt, distribute,
commercially exploit, or publicly display the standard or any portion thereof in any
manner whatsoever without BSI’s prior written consent.
Storing and using standards
Standards purchased in soft copy format:
• A British Standard purchased in soft copy format is licensed to a sole named
user for personal or internal company use only.
• The standard may be stored on more than 1 device provided that it is accessible
by the sole named user only and that only 1 copy is accessed at any one time.
• A single paper copy may be printed for personal or internal company use only.
• Standards purchased in hard copy format:
• A British Standard purchased in hard copy format is for personal or internal
company use only.
• It may not be further reproduced – in any format – to create an additional copy.
This includes scanning of the document.
If you need more than 1 copy of the document, or if you wish to share the
document on an internal network, you can save money by choosing a subscription
product (see ‘Subscriptions’).
Subscriptions
Our range of subscription services are designed to make using standards
easier for you. For further information on our subscription products go to
bsigroup.com/subscriptions.
With British Standards Online (BSOL) you’ll have instant access to over 55,000
British and adopted European and international standards from your desktop.
It’s available 24/7 and is refreshed daily so you’ll always be up to date.
You can keep in touch with standards developments and receive substantial
discounts on the purchase price of standards, both in single copy and subscription
format, by becoming a BSI Subscribing Member.
PLUS is an updating service exclusive to BSI Subscribing Members. You will
automatically receive the latest hard copy of your standards when they’re
revised or replaced.
To f nd out more about becoming a BSI Subscribing Member and the benef ts
of membership, please visit bsigroup.com/shop.
With a Multi-User Network Licence (MUNL) you are able to host standards
publications on your intranet. Licences can cover as few or as many users as you
wish. With updates supplied as soon as they’re available, you can be sure your
documentation is current. For further information, email subscriptions@bsigroup.com.
Revisions
Our British Standards and other publications are updated by amendment or revision.
We continually improve the quality of our products and services to benef t your
business. If you f nd an inaccuracy or ambiguity within a British Standard or other
BSI publication please inform the Knowledge Centre.
Useful Contacts
Customer Services
Tel: +44 345 086 9001
Email (orders): orders@bsigroup. com
Email (enquiries): cservices@bsigroup. com
Subscriptions
Tel: +44 345 086 9001
Email: subscriptions@bsigroup. com
Knowledge Centre
Tel: +44 20 8996 7004
Email: knowledgecentre@bsigroup. com
Copyright & Licensing
Tel: +44 20 8996 7070
Email: copyright@bsigroup. com
BSI Group Headquarters
389 Chiswick High Road London W4 4AL UK
This page deliberately left blank